JP2019154479A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an attention degree and an amusement in a game for improving game motivation of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, in a normal pattern winning game executed when a normal pattern winning lottery executed with passage of game balls in a through gate as momentum, is won, game balls can enter an electronic role winning hole 376. With game ball entry to the electronic role winning hole 376 as momentum, a V-winning hole is opened, with game ball entry to the V-winning hole as momentum, a jackpot game including a round game in which a variable winning hole 394 is opened by actuating a variable winning door 391, is executed. The jackpot game is executed in an interval between opening of the electronic role winning hole 376 when the electronic role winning hole 376 is opened multi times in the normal pattern winning game. The variable winning door 391 has a groove part 395 for delaying movement of game balls by moving the game balls on a meander path. The round game is configured so that, an opening time of the variable winning hole 394 is constant.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  As a pachinko gaming machine, there is a game in which a special symbol variation game that performs a lottery lottery and notifies a lottery result when a game ball enters a starting port is executed. In this type of pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot game that allows a large amount of game balls to be acquired is executed when the jackpot lottery is won (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-213044 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in games and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
Route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route;
Retaining means (391, 395, 398, 399) for retaining the game ball that has moved along the movement route at a position where the game ball can enter the third entrance (394) in the third game switching. )When,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The game balls retained in the staying means (391, 395, 398, 399) enter the third entrance (394) in the third allowable state,
The third switching game is characterized in that a ball allowable time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third allowable state is fixed.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows the principal part of the right side area | region in the game board shown in FIG. The longitudinal cross-sectional view of the principal part of the right side area | region in the game board shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the electric prize winning device along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. 5. The figure for demonstrating the electric character winning door of the electric character winning device of FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the V prize winning device along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 5. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the V prize winning device along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 5. Sectional drawing of the V prize-winning apparatus which follows the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. Sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus which follows the X5-X5 cutting line of FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing pattern of the electric role winning door in an electric role winning device. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The timing chart which shows an example of the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the electric winning door and the opening / closing timing of the variable winning door. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of a main controller. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. The figure which shows the example of a display in the performance display monitor of a performance information display apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of through gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the pending | holding command setting process performed by the through gate process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the general game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the general game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the general game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game control process per common figure performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game control process per common figure performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the small hit game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the small hit game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the common figure game effect process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. The figure which shows an example of the table used with an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. The figure for demonstrating an example of the variable prize door of the variable prize apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the variable prize-winning door of FIG. The figure which shows the other example (modification 1) of a variable prize-winning door. The figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the variable prize-winning door of FIG. The figure for demonstrating the other example (modification 2) of a variable prize-winning apparatus. The figure for demonstrating the other example (modification 3) of a variable winning apparatus. The figure for demonstrating the other example (modification 4) of a variable winning apparatus. The timing chart for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning door of the variable winning apparatus of FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an electrical decoration unit 27.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 13) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). The operation button 20 is an operation that is executed when a player performs an operation on the operation button 20 during a predetermined specific period, for example, when an effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 4). It is operated to execute button effects.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the usual game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that, for example, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. .

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11 and execute a sound output effect that outputs sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs a lamp effect in a usual game effect etc. by the blinking aspect, such as lighting color and lighting or light extinction.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a through gate 317, an out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a defined passage 35 (route defining means), and a main display. A unit 36, an electric winning device 37, a V winning device 38, and a variable winning device 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313 are discharged from the out opening 318.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313 is provided in the lower center and directly below the through gate 317, and a game ball that has been launched into the left region of the game board 31 and passed through the through gate 317 can enter. is there. The general winning port 313 and the out port 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. On the back side of the game board 31, a general winning sensor 313a (see FIG. 13) capable of detecting a game ball entering the general winning port 313 is provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313 and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13).

  The general winning sensor 313a and the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of these sensors 313a and 318a are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls according to the detection result of the general winning sensor 313a. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball entering by the general winning sensor 313a may be referred to as winning. Similarly, detection of a game ball entered by an electronic winning prize sensor 37a, a V winning sensor 38a, a normal winning sensor 38b, and a variable winning sensor 39a, which will be described later, may be referred to as winning. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13). The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launch mechanism 32.

  The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and is provided immediately above the general winning opening 313. The through gate 317 includes a gate passage sensor 317a (see FIG. 13) that can individually detect a passing game ball. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched into the left area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317. When the gate passing sensor 317a detects that a game ball has passed through the through gate 317, a lottery for determining whether or not to open an electric winning prize opening 376 of the electric winning prize device 37 described later is determined. Is executed.

  The general winning sensor 313a, the gate passing sensor 317a, and the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13) are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entering of a game ball by other detection methods. Any arbitrary sensor may be used.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed at a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the variable display effect in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the lottery result in the lottery per common symbol performed by the main control unit 331 according to the passing of the game ball to the through gate 317. , And various game effects such as a general-game game effect executed in association with the variation display of the decorative symbols. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols with numbers “1” to “7” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative symbols. In the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are seven types of decorative designs, “1” to “7”.

  In the gaming machine 10, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped after the elapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 in the ordinary game. The More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the ornamental symbols vary along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of ornamental symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which decorative symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the decorative symbols clearly indicates the lottery result in the lottery per universal drawing by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result in the lottery per common drawing is “winning”, a state in which three decorative symbols of the same type are arranged on the active line is displayed, and it is clearly shown that it is per common drawing. In addition, when the lottery result is “winning”, the type per common figure is assigned to any of 1 to 7 per normal figure (see FIG. 15B), but for the type per common figure, the effective line It is clearly indicated by a combination of decorative patterns. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “winning” and the type per common figure is assigned to “1 per common figure”, the state where the symbol combination “111” is arranged on the active line is displayed. The Similarly, “222” for “2”, “333” for “3”, “444” for “4”, “555” for “5”, In the case of "6 per win", a state is displayed in which the symbol combinations of "666" and "777 per ordinary map" are arranged in an active line. On the other hand, when the lottery result is “displaced”, a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are arranged on the active line (for example, “323” (reach missed eye) or “723” (separate missed eye)) is displayed. .

  In the ordinary game, the symbol display section 341 displays the ordinary game effect as described above while the decorative symbols are variably displayed. The general drawing game production suggests or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is a win.

  Further, the symbol display unit 341 prompts the player to, for example, launch a game ball in the right region of the game board 31 in a game per game in which an electric prize winning port 376 of an electric prize winning device 37 described later is opened. An image is displayed, and an image indicating that a game ball has been entered is displayed in an electric winning prize opening 376 of an electric winning prize device 37 described later. In addition, when a game ball is entered in the electric winning award port 376, a special determination as to whether or not to execute a small hit game in which a V winning port 384 and a normal winning port 385 of the V winning device 38 described later are opened. Although the lottery is executed, the lottery result of the lottery per special figure may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Further, in the symbol display unit 341, in a small hit game in which a V winning port 384 and a normal winning port 385 of the V winning device 38, which will be described later, are opened, for example, a player can launch a game ball into the right area of the game board 31. Is displayed, and an image indicating that a game ball has been entered is displayed in a V prize opening 384 of the V prize device 38 described later. Also in the small hit game, the lottery result of the lottery per special figure may be continuously displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Further, in the symbol display unit 341, for example, an opening effect indicating that a jackpot game is started and a plurality of round games are executed in a jackpot game in which a variable prize opening 394 of the variable prize device 39 described later is opened. A jackpot game effect including an opening / closing execution mode effect and an ending effect indicating that the jackpot game is ended is displayed. Further, in the opening effect, the type of the jackpot game (8R jackpot game or 16R jackpot game), that is, the number of opening / closing of the variable prize opening 394 may be displayed. Also, in the ending effect, after the jackpot game is over, an image that clearly indicates or suggests that the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened or closed because the normal winning is being executed, or the normal illustration You may make it display the image which shows clearly or suggests that the opening / closing of the electric winning box door 371 of the electric winning combination apparatus 37 is not performed because winning is complete | finished.

  The regulation passage 35 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 34 in the game board 31, and regulates the movement path of the game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 to the same path. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the regulation passage 35 is integrally formed in a crank shape with, for example, synthetic resin. Of course, the regulation passage 35 may be constituted by a plurality of members. The entrance of the prescribed passage 35 is arranged at the upper right part of the game board 31, and all of the game balls launched into the right area of the game board 31 are introduced into the prescribed passage 35, and the prescribed passage 35 moves toward the outlet 354. To do. Further, the prescribed passage 35 is provided with an electrical winning opening 351, a V winning opening 352, and a variable winning opening 353. The electric winning box opening 351 allows the electric winning button 371 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the electric winning device 37 described later, and the electric winning door 371 is rearward in the game per game (first game). When it is moved to, the game ball is allowed to enter the electric prize winning port 376 in the electric prize winning device 37 (see FIG. 7B). The V winning opening 352 allows the V winning door 381 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the V winning device 38, which will be described later, and the V winning door 381 is moved rearward in the small hit game (second game). Opening to allow the game balls to enter the V winning port 384 and the normal winning port 385 in the V winning device 38 (see FIG. 9B and FIG. 10B). The variable prize opening 353 allows the variable prize door 391 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the variable prize device 39 described later, and when the variable prize door 391 is moved rearward in the big hit game (third game). By being opened, game balls are allowed to enter the variable winning opening 394 in the variable winning device 39 (see FIG. 12B). In other words, the electric prize winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 are arranged in this order along the moving path of the game ball in the prescribed passage 35. That is, the priority order in which the game balls 99 are entered in this order is defined for the electric winning award port 376, the V winning award port 384, and the variable winning award port 394. As a result, the common winning game, the small hitting game, and the big hitting game are preferentially executed in this order, so that the big hit game capable of acquiring a large amount of game balls is easily executed. Details of this point will be described later. When the game balls 99 are launched to the right area of the game board 31 with the same strength (stroke), the movement speeds of the game balls 99 are made uniform. Accordingly, the time from launching the game ball 99 to reaching the electric winning box opening 351, the time to reaching the V winning opening 352, and the time to reach the variable winning opening 353. It is made uniform. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right area of the game board 31 with the same strength (stroke), the time until it enters the electric winning prize opening 376 of the electric prize winning device 37 described later, V described later The time required to enter the V winning opening 384 of the winning apparatus 38 and the time required to enter the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning apparatus 39 described later are equalized between the game balls 99. As a result, it is possible to equalize (fix) the execution time of the game per opening when the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37 is opened, and the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38 is opened. It is possible to equalize (fix) the execution time of the played small hit game, and to equalize (fix) the execution time of the game per open figure when the variable winning port 394 of the variable winning device 39 is opened. It becomes possible. Therefore, as described later, when the big hit game is executed in the interval between the opening of the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per bonus game (see FIG. 18), the big hit game is ended within the interval between the open times. It becomes possible.

  In addition, a game ball 99 that moves in the prescribed passage 35 enters the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37 in the electric open / close game of the game per game, and the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small game. In the jackpot game, it is possible to enter each of the variable winning openings 394 of the variable winning device 39, so that the player can continue to hit the right side of the game board 31 to the right area of the game board 31 and open and close the electric role. A game cycle in which a game, a jackpot game, and a jackpot game are sequentially executed in this order can be executed.

  The arrangement order of the electric winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, and for example, upstream along the moving path of the game ball in the prescribed passage 35. From the side, other orders such as the variable winning device 39, the V winning device 38, and the electric winning device 37 may be used. Further, one or two of the electric winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 may be arranged in a region different from the prescribed passage 35. The game balls that have not passed any of the electric winning award opening 351, the V winning opening 352, and the variable winning opening 353 are discharged from the out port 354 to the back side of the game board 31 and are out balls. It is guided to a position that can be detected by the sensor 318a.

  The main display unit 36 is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31 and includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a multi-game game holding number display unit 362, and a special symbol display unit 363. The arrangement of the main display unit 36 may be the lower left part or the lower right part of the game board 31.

  The normal symbol display unit 361 clearly indicates the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary drawing executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. In the lottery per regular drawing, whether or not the electric winning prize door 371 of the electric winning prize device 37 is operated, that is, the electric winning prize opening 351 of the specified passage 35 is opened to play a game to the electric winning prize winning part 372 described later. It is determined whether or not to allow the ball to enter. The normal symbol display unit 361 includes a 7-segment LED display, and the lottery result in the lottery per common symbol is clearly indicated by a number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per common drawing is “winning”, any one of “1” to “7” is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 according to the type per common symbol. Then, as will be described later, the number displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 matches the number of times the electric winning prize opening 376 is opened in the normal winning game (see FIGS. 15B and 15C). The number displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 corresponds to the maximum number of times that the jackpot game is executed by one ordinary figure. Details of this point will be described later. On the other hand, if the lottery result in the usual lottery is “out”, any number other than “1” to “7”, that is, “0”, “8”, and “9” is displayed ( FIG. 15). The normal symbol display unit 361 may be configured by another display including an LED lamp group or the like instead of the 7-segment LED display. In addition, the lottery result in the lottery per common drawing may be displayed by other symbols such as alphabets and symbols in addition to numbers.

  The normal figure game hold number display unit 362 displays the normal symbol change display hold number N in the normal symbol display part 361 generated by the passing of the game ball to the through gate 317. The usual game number-of-games display unit 362 includes four LED lamps arranged in a row, and the number of held N is displayed according to the number of lighting of the LED lamps. In the present embodiment, the maximum hold number N is 4, but when the hold number N is 0, for example, all four LED lamps are turned off, and when the hold number N is 1, one LED lamp is turned on. Illuminated (3 LED lamps are extinguished), 2 LED lamps are illuminated (2 LED lamps are extinguished) when the number of holdings is 2, and 3 when the number of holdings N is 3. LED lamps are turned on (one LED lamp is turned off), and when the holding number N is 4, all four LED lamps are turned on. In addition, instead of the four LED lamps, the ordinary game number-of-games display unit 362 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED display.

  The special symbol display unit 363 clearly indicates the lottery result in the lottery per special figure that is executed in response to the winning of a game ball in the electric winning award port 376 (see FIGS. 6 and 7) of the electric winning device 37. In the lottery per special figure, whether or not to execute a small winning game for operating the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38, that is, the V winning opening 352 of the prescribed passage 35 is opened to play the V winning portion 382. It is determined whether or not to allow the ball to enter. In the present embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated in the lottery per special figure is executed, and the jackpot game is sent to the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38. This is executed based on the entrance of the game ball 99.

  The special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment LED display, and a lottery result in a lottery per special symbol is clearly indicated by a number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per special figure is “small hit”, the special symbol display unit 363 displays “hits” according to the big hit type distributed according to the value of the big hit type counter C5 (see FIG. 14). “3” or “7” is displayed. Specifically, “3” is displayed when the jackpot type is 8R jackpot, and “7” is displayed when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot. In addition, when the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is “off”, numbers other than “3” and “7”, that is, “0”, “1”, “2”, “4”, “5” , “6”, “8”, and “9” are displayed (see FIG. 17E). The special symbol display unit 363 may be configured by another display including an LED lamp group or the like instead of the 7-segment LED display. The lottery result in the lottery per special symbol may be displayed by other symbols such as alphabets and symbols in addition to numbers, and may be clearly indicated in the symbol display unit 341 in addition to the special symbol display unit 363. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type distribution is executed in response to winning of the game ball 99 in the electric winning award port 376 (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 7) of the electric winning device 37 in the game per ordinary figure. However, the jackpot type distribution may be executed in response to winning of the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game.

  The electrification winning device 37 is operated when a game per first figure (first game) is executed because a lottery result in a lottery per normal figure is a win. In a game per game in which the electric winning device 37 is operated, in an electric opening / closing game (first switching game) in which an electric winning winning opening 376 is opened and closed by an electric winning winning door 371 described later, the electric winning winning opening 376 is opened. The game ball 99 can be entered, and an opportunity to activate the V winning device 38 is given. In the present embodiment, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the electric winning prize opening 376, the special figure executed based on the game ball 99 entering the electric winning prize opening 376. When the lottery result in the lottery is a small win, a small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated is executed (see FIG. 17C). When the V winning device 38 is operated, a big hit game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated is executed by inserting a game ball 99 into a V winning port 384 to be described later, and the player has a large number of game balls. An opportunity to win 99 is given. In other words, when the electric power open / close game is started in the per-game game, three games of the open / closed game, the small hit game, and the big hit game per game are executed in this order as one game cycle. . In addition, in the game per game, one to seven electric opening and closing games are executed according to the types A to G per game when the lottery result in the lottery per game is win (Fig. 15 (B)), when the electric power opening and closing game is executed a plurality of times (any of 2 to 7 times), each time the electric power opening and closing game is executed through the interval between opening. In other words, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, the big hit game is terminated within the interval between releases, so that the game can be executed a plurality of times according to the number of times of the electric role opening / closing game for one game per game. The cycle can be executed. As a result, when a power combination opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, a large number of jackpot games can be executed according to the number of times of a power combination opening / closing game per game per game.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the electric winning device 37 includes an electric winning door 371 (first electric accessory means) and an electric winning portion 372.

  As shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, the electric prize winning door 371 opens and closes the electric prize winning opening 351 of the specified passage 35 in the electric opening and closing game of the game per figure, A state where the game ball 99 is prevented from entering the winning portion 372 (first restricted state) and a state where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric winning portion 372 (first permitted state). Switch. Specifically, in the electric role winning door 371, entry of the game ball 99 into the electric role winning portion 372 is restricted by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. It is possible to move in the front-rear direction D1 between the standby position (see FIG. 7A) and the operation position (see FIG. 7B) where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric winning portion 372. is there. Then, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win, the electric role winning door 371 has a standby position and an operating position in an opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 15B and FIG. 16) according to the type per common figure. Moved between. As a result, in the game per game, the electric power open / close game is executed the number of times corresponding to the type per game (from 1 to 7 times).

  Here, although details of the opening / closing pattern will be described later, the electric winning prize winning door 371 is moved from the standby position to the operating position in the electric open / close game, and is returned to the standby position after a predetermined time has elapsed (first predetermined condition). The operating time up to (the opening time of the opening portion 351 for the electric winning award) is, for example, when at least one gaming ball 99 is continuously launched into the right area of the gaming board 31 and the electric winning award is received by at least one gaming ball 99. It is set as the time which can enter the part 372. Specifically, the operating time of the electric winning door 371 is set to a time equal to or longer than the launch interval (eg, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls 99, and is set to, for example, not less than 0.6 seconds and not more than 20 seconds. It is set to 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less, more preferably 2 seconds or more and 5 seconds or less, and a relatively short time. In addition, when the electric role winning door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per game, all the operating times of the electric winning winning doors 371 are set to be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the operation time of the electric prize winning door 371 is set to be the same or substantially the same in the plurality of open / close patterns. That is, the operation time of the electric winning box door 371 is fixed regardless of the opening / closing pattern type and the opening / closing timing.

  In this way, by setting the operation time of the electric winning door 371 to be equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game balls 99, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 is provided. Is moved to a position where it can pass through the electric winning combination opening 351 and entered into the electric winning combination portion 372. As a result, when the game ball 99 enters the electric role winning port 376 of the electric role winning unit 372 to be described later, the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated becomes the game ball 99 in the electric role winning port 376. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called punctures that are not executed by not entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the small hit game is not executed and consequently the big hit game is not executed. In addition, since the condition for the electric role winning door 371 to be moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position is the passage of a predetermined time, it is necessary to open and close the electric role winning door 371 in a game per game. Time (operation time) is fixed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to fixing or equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles of a bonus game and a jackpot game, and opening / closing of the electric winning door 371 in a game per game. As a result, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning box door 371 in the game per bonus, and to end the jackpot game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next opening of the electric role winning door 371, none of the electric role opening / closing games, the small hit games and the jackpot games are executed, and the game board 31 Even if the game ball 99 is launched in the right area of the game, it is not possible to expect a prize ball to be paid out. For this reason, the player makes a stop to stop launching the game ball 99, increases the number N of the normal symbol variation display due to the passing of the game ball 99 to the through gate 317, or the game ball to the general winning opening 313. It is assumed that left-handed hitting of the game ball 99 is performed in the left region of the game board 31 in anticipation of the payout of the winning ball due to 99 entering. However, if the game is stopped or left-handed during a normal game, the next winning combination game is started and the winning combination door 371 is activated. If the game ball 99 cannot reach the right area of the game board 31 due to a delay in the launch of the game ball 99, a clogged ball, a defective launch, or the like, the game ball 99 enters the electric winning award port 376. There is a concern that the electric role winning door 371 returns without being played and the electric role opening / closing game is ended. When the electric role opening / closing game is finished without the game ball 99 entering the electric role winning opening 376, the lottery is not performed per special figure, so the small hit game is not executed, and as a result, the big win game Will not be executed. Therefore, if a player makes a stop or left strike during a period in which none of the open / close game, small hit game, or big hit game during the normal game is executed, the player has not been able to acquire the original in the big hit game. The game ball 99 that should have been obtained cannot be acquired.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot game can be finished at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric role winning door 371, the player can stop or left strike at the timing when the right-handed payout of the winning ball cannot be expected. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the occurrence of a situation where a big hit game is not executed due to the occurrence of a situation where the game ball 99 does not enter the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening and closing game is suppressed, and the game ball that should have been originally acquired in the big hit game The possibility that 99 can be acquired can be increased.

  In this embodiment, the opening / closing of the electric winning door 371 in a game per game is returned from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position after a predetermined time, but before the predetermined time has elapsed. Alternatively, when a predetermined number of game balls 99 are entered into the electric winning prize opening 376, it may be returned to the standby position. In this case, since the opening / closing of the electric prize winning door 371 in the game per game is completed before the predetermined time elapses, the time required for the game cycle becomes the electric prize winning in the game per game according to the elapse of the predetermined time. This is shorter than when the door 371 is opened and closed. Therefore, since the time required for the game cycle is shortened, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between opening of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game.

  As shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, the electric winning prize door 371 has a plurality of guide portions 373 that define the movement path of the game ball 99. The plurality of guide portions 373 are arranged in a zigzag pattern along the left-right direction D3 in the concave portion 374 provided on the front side of the electric prize winning door 371. Therefore, in the electric winning prize door 371, the game ball 99 moved from the right side to the electric winning prize door 371 is moved in the left direction while moving in the front-rear direction D1. In other words, the game ball 99 passing through the electric role winning door 371 is moved in the left direction while meandering, so that the moving distance is increased as compared with the case where the game ball 99 is moved linearly in the left direction. As a result, the staying time of the game ball 99 is increased by delaying the movement of the game ball 99 at the electric winning prize door 371. The plurality of guide portions 373 are formed so that the residence time at the electric winning prize door 371 is equal to or greater than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99 by appropriately setting the number, shape, and the like. The Specifically, for example, the residence time of the game ball 99 at the electronic winning door 371 is set to be 1 to 5 times the launch interval of the game ball 99, preferably 1 to 3 times Is set. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31, it is possible to maintain a state in which at least one game ball 99 moves on the electric winning winning door 371. As a result, at any timing regardless of the opening / closing timing of the electric role winning door 371, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 is won as an electric role. The ball is entered into the part 372. As a result, when the game ball 99 enters the electric role winning port 376 of the electric role winning unit 372 to be described later, the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated becomes the game ball 99 in the electric role winning port 376. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called punctures that are not executed by not entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the small hit game is not executed and consequently the big hit game is not executed.

  Further, the plurality of guide portions 373 can be integrally formed when the electric winning award door 371 is formed by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the plurality of guide portions 373 can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a structure which delays the movement of the game ball 99 in the electric role winning door 371, the several guide part 373 is not limited to the structure arrange | positioned in zigzag form. For example, the moving distance is increased by providing a meandering groove in the electric winning door 371, and the moving resistance is increased by providing a plurality of concave or convex portions scattered in a matrix or the like on the electric winning door 371. This may reduce the moving speed of the game ball 99.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order for at least one game ball 99 to enter the electric role winning portion 372 when the electric role winning door 371 is operated, the operation time of the electric role winning door 371 is the firing interval of the game balls 99. In addition to the above setting, a plurality of guide portions 373 for delaying the movement of the game ball 99 are provided in the electric winning prize door 371. At least one gaming ball 99 is charged when the electric winning prize door 371 is operated. As long as it is possible to enter the winning prize winning portion 372, the operation time of the electric winning winning door 371 may be set to be less than the launch interval of the game balls 99, and the plurality of guide portions 373 of the winning winning prize door 371 may be set. It may be omitted and the game ball 99 may be moved linearly.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, when the game ball 99 is moving through the electric winning box door 371, the electric winning box door 371 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 7A) to the operating position (see FIG. 7B). ))), The game ball 99 of the electric prize winning door 371 cannot be moved backward by the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 in which the backward movement is restricted falls from the electric winning prize door 371. On the other hand, the electric winning winning opening 351 is opened by moving the electric winning winning door 371 to the operating position. As a result, the game ball 99 that passes through the electric role winning door 371 when the electric role winning door 371 is moved backward from the standby position to the operating position is transferred to the electric role to be described later via the electric role winning opening 351. The ball is entered in the electric winning award port 376 of the winning portion 372. Further, when the game ball 99 that has fallen from the electric role winning door 371 is restricted by the backward movement of the game ball 99 of the electric role winning door 371 and is restricted from moving backward, the electric role winning door 376 is entered. The timing at which the game balls 99 moving through the door 371 fall is made uniform between the game balls 99. As a result, the time from the start of the operation of the electric role winning door 371 to the time when the game ball 99 on the electric role winning door 371 is entered into the electric role winning port 376 is made uniform. After the operation of 371 is started, the time during which a game ball 99 is detected to enter the electric winning prize opening 376 by an electric winning prize sensor 37a described later can be made uniform by the operation of the electric winning prize door 371 each time. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game that can be executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376 can be made uniform with respect to the operation of the electric winning prize door 371 each time. In addition, the start timing of the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38, which will be described later in the small hit game, can be made uniform. The end timing of the jackpot game can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to end the jackpot game in the interval between the opening of the electric prize winning door 371 in the normal game.

  By the way, when the means for delaying the movement of the game balls 99 such as the plurality of guide portions 373 is not provided in the electric winning prize winning door 371, if the staying time of the gaming balls 99 in the electric winning prize winning door 371 is short, the electric winning combination There can be either a state where the game ball 99 is moving on the electric role winning door 371 at a timing when the winning door 371 is opened or a state where it is not moving. In other words, when the electric ball winning door 371 is opened, the game ball 99 moving along the electric character winning door 371 falls and enters the electric winning port 376, and has moved from the upstream side of the electric winning door 371. There is a case where the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376. In these cases, since the moving distance of the game ball 99 required from when the electric role winning door 371 is opened to when it enters the electric role winning entrance 376 is different, the electric winning award entrance from the start of the opening of the electric role winning door 371 is different. The time until the game ball 99 enters the ball 376 is different. As a result, when the small hit game is executed based on the game ball 99 entering the electric winning prize opening 376 in the game per game, the small hit when the operation start of the electric winning door 371 is used as a reference. Unevenness occurs at the start timing of the game. Such non-uniformity induces non-uniformity in not only the start timing but also the end timing of the big hit game started based on the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game. To do. As a result, in the case of a normal winning game in which the electric role winning door 371 is opened a plurality of times, it is assumed that the big winning game does not end until the next opening of the electric winning winning door 371 starts.

  On the other hand, by providing the plurality of guide portions 373 in the electric winning prize door 371 as described above, at least one game ball 99 moves on the electric winning prize door 371 when the electric winning prize door 371 is opened. When the state is maintained, the game ball 99 that moves the electric role winning door 371 falls from the electric role winning door 371 because the backward movement of the game ball 99 of the electric role winning door 371 is restricted. A ball is entered into the electric winning award 376. Then, when the game ball 99 that has fallen from the electric role winning door 371 is restricted by the backward movement of the game ball 99 of the electric role winning door 371 and is restricted from moving backward, the electric role winning prize 376 is entered. The timing at which the game balls 99 on the door 371 fall from the electronic winning door 371 is made uniform among the game balls 99. This makes it possible to equalize the time from the start of the operation of the electric role winning door 371 to the time of entering the electric role winning port 376. The timing at which the game ball 99 enters the electric winning award opening 376 by the winning sensor 37a can be made uniform by the operation of the electric winning award door 371 each time. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game that can be executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376 can be made uniform with respect to the operation of the electric winning prize door 371 each time, The start timing of the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, which will be described later, is activated, and the end timing of the jackpot game is further increased. It can be made uniform. Accordingly, it is possible to end the jackpot game at the interval between opening of the winning combination door 371 in the game per game where the winning combination door 371 is opened a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the electric winning part 372 is provided immediately below the electric winning opening 351 and the electric winning door 371 of the prescribed passage 35. The electric winning combination unit 372 includes an upper opening 375, an electric winning award 376 (first winning opening), and an electric winning award sensor 37a. The upper opening 375 allows a game ball 99 passing through the electric winning prize opening 351 to enter the electric winning prize portion 372. The electric winning prize opening 376 communicates with the upper opening 375, and the game ball 99 that has passed through the electric winning prize opening 351 and the upper opening 375 is inserted. That is, the electric winning award opening 351 is opened at the electric winning award opening 376 by the movement of the electric winning award door 371 to the operating position (FIG. 7B), so that the electric winning award opening 351 is opened. The game ball 99 that has passed through the upper opening 375 is entered. In addition, when a game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376, a lottery per special drawing is executed. In the lottery per special figure, it is determined with a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, 299/300 (see FIG. 17C)) that the small hit game for operating the V winning device 38 is executed. When it is determined that the small hit game is to be executed, the jackpot type for executing the big hit game capable of acquiring a large amount of game balls 99 by the operation of the variable winning device 39 is also determined. In addition, when a game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls 99 is paid out. Since the right to draw per special figure is not reserved, unlike the right to draw per special figure, a plurality of game balls 99 are elected to win an electric role in one operation of the electric role winning door 371 in a game per common figure. Even in the case of entering the mouth 376, the number of lotteries per special drawing is one.

  The electric winning prize sensor 37 a is provided in a path for discharging the gaming ball 99 that has passed through the electric winning prize opening 376 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the gaming ball 99 has passed through the electric winning prize opening 376. The electric winning prize sensor 37a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 13), and the detection result of the electric winning prize sensor 37a is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls 99 in accordance with the detection result of the electric winning prize sensor 37a. An electric winning prize flag indicating that the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning prize opening 376 is set to ON, and an electric winning prize command is set. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits an electric winning prize command to the sound lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning award port 376, and the player can know that the game ball 99 has entered the electric role winning port 376 in the symbol display unit 341. It is possible to execute an effect to notify.

  Here, the electric winning prize opening 376 is provided at a position where the game ball 99 moving in the prescribed passage 35 can enter. On the other hand, the game balls 99 moving along the prescribed passage 35 move along the same route. For this reason, the moving speeds of the game balls 99 launched with a certain strength (stroke) in the right region of the game board 31 are equalized. As a result, when a game ball 99 is launched with a certain strength in the right area of the game board 31 in a game per game, an electric prize winning that allows the game ball 99 to enter the electric prize winning opening 376 from the launch of the game ball 99 is achieved. Time until it reaches the door 371 is made uniform. Therefore, when the electric winning prize opening 376 is opened in a game per game, it is unexpected from the time when the gaming ball 99 is launched until the gaming ball 99 is moved to a position where it can enter the electric winning prize opening 376. Can be prevented from taking a long time. This effectively prevents the occurrence of a situation where the small hit game is not executed by effectively preventing the occurrence of the so-called puncture, in which the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376 in the game per hit. Is done. As a result, the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed is effectively prevented, and the occurrence of a disadvantage can be prevented if the player cannot acquire a prize ball that can be originally acquired by the execution of the jackpot game. Further, in addition to equalization of the time from the launch of the game ball 99 until the game ball 99 reaches the electric winning prize door 371 that can enter the electric prize winning opening 376, the electric prize winning is performed as described above. By providing a plurality of guide portions 373 on the door 371, when the game ball 99 is launched with a certain strength, the operation of the electric winning box door 371 is started and then an electric winning prize port 376 by an electric winning prize sensor 37a described later. Since the timing at which the entry of the game ball 99 is detected can be made uniform by the operation of the electric winning box door 371 each time, the entry of the gaming ball 99 from the launch of the gaming ball 99 to the electric winning port 376 is detected. The time to be played can be made uniform by the operation of the electric prize winning door 371 each time. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game can be made uniform with respect to the operation of the electric winning prize winning door 371 each time, and further, the start timing and the end timing of the big hit game can be made uniform. It is possible to end the jackpot game at the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the game that is opened once.

  As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the V winning device 38 operates when the game ball 99 is won in the electric winning prize opening 376 of the electric winning device 37 and the lottery result in the special drawing is a small win. Is done. When the V winning device 38 is operated, a small hit game (second game) that allows a game ball 99 to enter a V winning port 384 to be described later is executed, and an opportunity to operate the variable winning device 39 is given. The The V winning device 38 includes a V winning door 381 (second electric accessory means) and a V winning portion 382.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the V winning door 381 opens and closes the V winning opening 352 of the prescribed passage 35, and the game ball 99 is restricted from entering the V winning portion 382 (second). (Restricted state) and a state where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning portion 382 (second allowable state). Specifically, the V winning door 381 is a standby position where the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning portion 382 is restricted by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. (See FIG. 9A and FIG. 10A) and the operation position (see FIG. 9B and FIG. 10B) where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning portion 382. It is possible to move in the front-rear direction D1. The V winning door 381 moves from the standby position to the operating position when the game ball 99 is won in the electric winning award opening 376 of the electric winning device 37 and the special winning lottery is won. After a lapse of time (second predetermined condition), the standby position is restored. The operation time from when the operation of the V winning door 381 is started until it returns to the standby position (opening time of the V winning opening 352) is, for example, that the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right area of the game board 31. In such a case, it is determined that at least one game ball 99 can enter the V winning portion 382. Specifically, the operating time of the V winning door 381 is set to a time that is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game balls 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds). It is set to a time, preferably 1 to 30 times (for example, 0.6 seconds to 18 seconds) of the launch interval of the game ball 99, more preferably 2 to 20 times (for example 1) .2 seconds to 12 seconds), and more preferably 3 times to 10 times (for example, 1.8 seconds to 6 seconds) the launch interval of the game balls 99. As a result, as long as the normal game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right area of the game board 31 in the small hit game, the game ball 99 is surely entered into the V winning opening 384 and the normal launch is performed. A game with no puncture is added.

  As described above, when the operation time of the V winning door 381 is set to be equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game balls 99, at least one game when the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31. The ball 99 is moved to a position where it can pass through the V winning opening 352 and is then entered into the V winning portion 382. As a result, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is activated when the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 384 of the V winning unit 382, which will be described later, does not enter the V winning port 384. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called punctures that are not executed in the above. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, the time required for the small hit game (operation time) is fixed because the condition that the V winning door 381 is moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position is a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to fixing or equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles of a bonus game and a jackpot game, and opening / closing of the electric winning door 371 in a game per game. As a result, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning box door 371 in the game per bonus, and to end the jackpot game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become.

  In addition, if the jackpot game can be finished at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric role winning door 371, the player can stop or It is possible to suppress hitting and suppress occurrence of a situation where a big hit game is not executed due to occurrence of a situation where the game ball 99 does not enter the electric winning prize opening 376 in the electric opening and closing game, and can be originally acquired in the big hit game The possibility that the game ball 99 that should have been obtained can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the V winning door 381 is returned from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the game ball 99 is entered, it may be returned to the standby position. In this case, since the small hit game ends before the predetermined time elapses, the time required for the game cycle becomes shorter than when the small hit game ends after the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the time required for the game cycle is shortened, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between opening of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game.

  Further, the operation time of the V winning door 381 may be set to be less than the launch interval of the game balls 99. In this case, in the small hit game, the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 384, so that the big hit game is not executed and so-called puncture gameability can be provided. Then, by adjusting the operating time of the V winning door 381 to be less than the launch interval of the game balls 99, the probability of the game balls 99 entering the V winning opening 384 can be adjusted, so the occurrence rate of puncture can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to adjust the gameability according to the puncture occurrence rate. The probability of the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 384 is set to, for example, 1% to 95%, preferably 20% to 90%, and more preferably 50% to 80%. The

  The V winning portion 382 is provided immediately below the V winning opening 352 and the V winning door 381 of the prescribed passage 35. The V winning section 382 includes an upper opening 383, a V winning opening 384 ((special) second entrance), a normal winning opening 385 (normal second entrance), a switching unit 386, a V winning sensor 38a, and a normal winning sensor. 38b. The upper opening 383 allows a game ball 99 passing through the V winning opening 352 to enter the V winning portion 382. The V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 communicate with the upper opening 383, and the game ball 99 that has passed through the V winning opening 352 and the upper opening 383 can enter. In other words, the V winning opening 352 is opened at the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 by moving the V winning door 381 to the operating position (see FIGS. 9B and 10B). Thus, the game ball 99 passing through the V winning opening 352 and the upper opening 383 is inserted. In addition, the V winning opening 384 gives an opportunity to execute a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated when the game ball 99 passes. Then, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384, the jackpot determined when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning prize port 376 of the electric winning device 37 after the end of the small hit game. A jackpot game corresponding to the type is executed. The normal winning opening 385 is adjacent to the V winning opening 384 and is provided on the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball 99. In addition, when the game balls 99 are inserted into the V winning port 384 or the normal winning port 385, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls 99 are paid out.

  The switching unit 386 switches between a state where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V prize opening 384 and a state where the game ball 99 is restricted from entering the V prize opening 384. The switching unit 386 has a standby position for allowing the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 and a V winning opening 384 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The game ball 99 can be moved between operating positions that restrict entry of the game ball 99. The switching unit 386 limits the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 by moving from the standby position to the operating position triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384, for example. The game ball 99 is guided to the winning opening 385. In other words, the switching unit 386 plays a role of allowing the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 in preference to the normal winning opening 385. In addition, when the switching unit 386 is in a position that allows the game ball 99 to enter the V winning port 384 so that the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 384 in preference to the normal winning port 385. You may provide the obstruction | occlusion part which plugs up the normal winning opening 385 in the front side edge part of the switching part 386. FIG. Further, the switching unit 386 is returned to the standby position when the V winning opening 352 is closed by moving the V winning door 381 from the operating position to the standby position, for example.

  As described above, when the game ball 99 is continuously launched in the right area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 enters the V prize opening 384 in preference to the normal prize opening 385 by the operation of the switching unit 386. Therefore, the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 with a high probability (100% or almost 100%), and the big winning game is executed because the gaming ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 384 as described above. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called puncture.

  Note that the probability of entering the V winning opening 384 need not be 100% or substantially 100%, and may be a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability. The predetermined probability is, for example, 1% to 95%, preferably 20% to 90%, more preferably 50% to 80%. The predetermined probability can be adjusted, for example, by controlling the operation of the switching unit 386 at regular intervals or in a predetermined pattern in a state in which the V winning door 381 is open, and the operation time or the operating pattern of the V winning door 381 Can also be adjusted.

  The V winning sensor 38 a is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the V winning port 384 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the V winning port 384. The normal winning sensor 38 b is provided in a path for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the normal winning port 385 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the normal winning port 385. The V winning sensor 38a and the normal winning sensor 38b are electrically connected to the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 13), and the detection results of the V winning sensor 38a and the normal winning sensor 38b are input to the main control unit 331. The The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls 99 in accordance with the detection results of the V winning sensor 38a and the normal winning sensor 38b. Send. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets the V winning flag indicating that the gaming ball 99 has won the V winning opening 384 to ON when the gaming ball 99 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a. A V winning command for notifying that the game ball 99 has won is set in the V winning opening 384. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets the normal winning flag indicating that the gaming ball 99 has won the normal winning opening 385 to ON when the gaming ball 99 is detected by the normal winning sensor 38b. Then, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a V winning command to the sound lamp control device 5. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384, and notifies the player that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384 in the symbol display unit 341. It becomes possible to execute the production.

  Here, the V winning opening 384 is provided at a position where the game ball 99 moving in the prescribed passage 35 can enter. On the other hand, as described above, the game balls 99 moving in the prescribed passage 35 are moved at the same strength in order to move along the same route, so that the moving speed is made uniform between the game balls 99. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right region of the game board 31 with a certain strength in the small hit game, the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the game ball 99 entering the V prize opening 384 is made uniform. Is done. Thereby, when the V winning opening 384 is opened in the small hit game, it is unexpectedly long from the game ball 99 being launched until the gaming ball 99 is moved to a position where it can enter the V winning opening 384. It can prevent taking time. As a result, the occurrence of so-called puncture in which the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game is effectively prevented. Therefore, the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed is effectively prevented, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire a prize ball that can be originally acquired by the player by executing the jackpot game.

  Further, the time from the launch of the game ball 99 until the game ball 99 enters the V prize opening 384 is made uniform, so that a predetermined time elapses after the V prize door 381 is moved from the standby position to the operating position. Even if a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined number of game balls 99 are returned to the V winning opening 384 even if it is before, the end timing of the small hit game is set to the electric winning winning door 371 each time. From the start of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the start timing of the jackpot game executed when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game, and further uniformize the end timing of the jackpot game. As a result, when the electric winning box door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times in the normal winning game, it is possible to end the big hit game within the interval between opening of the electric winning door 371.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the variable winning device 39 operates when a small lottery is won in a special drawing lottery triggered by a game ball 99 entering the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38. Is done. When the variable winning device 39 is activated, a big hit game (second game) that allows a game ball 99 to enter a variable winning port 394 described later is executed. The jackpot game is a game including an open / close execution mode in which a plurality of (8 or 16 times in this embodiment) round games (second switching games) that give the player the opportunity to acquire a large amount of game balls 99 are executed. (See FIG. 18). The variable winning device 39 includes a variable winning door 391 (third electric accessory means) and a variable winning portion 392.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B), the variable winning door 391 opens and closes the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35, and the game balls 99 are restricted from entering the variable winning portion 392. The state in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning portion 392 (third allowable state) is switched. Specifically, the variable winning door 391 is a standby position in which the game ball 99 is restricted from entering the variable winning portion 392 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. It can move in the front-rear direction D1 between (see FIG. 12 (A)) and an operating position (see FIG. 12 (B)) in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning portion 392. Then, when the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 384, the variable winning door 391 is moved between the standby position and the operating position by the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type (see FIG. 17D). A condition (third predetermined condition) in which the variable winning door 391 is moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position (third predetermined condition) is the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) (variable winning door). 391 (operation time) (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, or the upper limit number (10) of game balls 99 enter a variable prize opening 394 described later.

  Here, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) (the operating time of the variable winning door 391) is the minimum necessary for entering the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394. Set to less than time. Specifically, the maximum opening time is set to be equal to or less than a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls 99 by the upper limit number (for example, 10), for example. Is preferably set to 0.5 times or more and 1 time or less, and more preferably set to 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval by the upper limit number.

  As described above, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) (the operating time of the variable winning door 391) is required to enter the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394. By setting the time equal to or less than the minimum time, the variable winning opening 394 is normally closed as the maximum opening time elapses before the upper limit number of game balls 99 are inserted into the variable winning opening 394. This makes it possible to equalize the time required for a round game in a jackpot game, which will be described later, by matching the maximum open time, and to equalize or fix the time required for the jackpot game. Therefore, it becomes easy to end the jackpot game within the interval between the opening of the electric prize winning door 371 in the game per hit. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the game for winning a game from being started by ending the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the game for a winning game while the jackpot game is being executed. As a result, there is a situation in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning prize opening 376 in the normal winning game, Occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of the winning to the V prize opening 384 because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384, It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot enter the variable prize opening 394 due to the opening of the electric prize winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game.

  In particular, the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 353 (variable prize opening 394) is set to be equal to or less than the time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of the game balls 99 by the upper limit number, and preferably the launch interval of the game balls 99 is set to the upper limit. The above disadvantage is given to the player more surely by setting it to 0.5 times to 1 time, more preferably 0.75 times to 0.95 times the time multiplied by the number. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, while preventing the number of game balls 99 entering the variable winning opening 394 within the maximum opening time from significantly decreasing with respect to the upper limit number, the passage of the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 394 is triggered. Round games can be terminated. As a result, while securing sufficient profits for the player in the jackpot game, the time required for the round game, and thus the time required for the jackpot game, is made more uniform, so that the electric role winning door in the game per game is more reliably achieved. The jackpot game can be ended within the interval between 371 releases.

  In addition, by setting the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 to be equal to or less than the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game ball 99 by the upper limit, the time required for the jackpot game is made uniform or fixed. It is possible to contribute to fixing or equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles of the electric winning box door 371 in the game, opening / closing of the small win game and the big win game. As a result, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning box door 371 in the game per bonus, and to end the jackpot game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning door 391 is returned from the standby position to the operating position after the maximum opening time has elapsed or when the upper limit number of game balls 99 have entered the variable winning slot 394. However, the variable winning door 391 may be returned after the maximum opening time has elapsed regardless of the maximum number of game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 394. In this case, since the time required for the jackpot game does not depend on the time until the upper limit number of game balls 99 are inserted into the variable winning opening 394, the time required for the jackpot game can be easily fixed. As a result, it is easy to end the jackpot game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning box door 371 in the game per bonus, and to end the jackpot game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become. Note that when the variable winning door 391 is returned after the maximum opening time has elapsed regardless of the maximum number of game balls 99 having entered the variable winning opening 394, the upper limit number (for example, 10) of game balls 99 has been entered. The maximum opening time is set for the time when the ball is not played.

  In addition, if the jackpot game can be finished at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric role winning door 371, the player can stop or It is possible to suppress hitting and suppress occurrence of a situation where a big hit game is not executed due to occurrence of a situation where the game ball 99 does not enter the electric winning prize opening 376 in the electric opening and closing game, and can be originally acquired in the big hit game The possibility that the game ball 99 that should have been obtained can be increased.

  The variable winning portion 392 is provided immediately below the variable winning opening 353 and the variable winning door 391 in the prescribed passage 35. The variable winning portion 392 includes an upper opening 393, a variable winning opening 394 (third winning opening), and a variable winning sensor 39a. The upper opening 393 allows the game ball 99 passing through the variable winning opening 353 to enter the variable winning portion 392. The variable winning opening 394 communicates with the upper opening 393, and the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 353 and the upper opening 393 is inserted. That is, the variable winning opening 353 and the upper opening 393 are opened in the variable winning opening 394 by opening the variable winning opening 353 by moving the variable winning door 391 to the operating position (FIG. 12B). A game ball 99 that has passed through is entered. Further, when the game balls 99 are inserted into the variable winning opening 394, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of the game balls 99 is paid out.

  The variable winning sensor 39a is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning port 394 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the variable winning port 394. The variable winning opening 394 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 13), and the detection result at the variable winning opening 394 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls 99 in accordance with the detection result at the variable prize opening 394, and variable. A variable winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has won a prize opening 394 is set to ON and a variable winning command is set. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a variable winning command to the sound lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 394, and in the symbol display section 341, the game ball 99 that has won the variable winning opening 394 in the round game of the big hit game is displayed. It is possible to display the number and display the number of game balls 99 (number of balls) acquired in the jackpot game.

  The electric winning prize sensor 37a, the V winning sensor 38a, the normal winning sensor 38b, and the variable winning sensor 39a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but individually detect the entering of the game ball by other detection methods. It may be any sensor that can.

  By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is one that can acquire a large amount of game balls by putting the game balls into a variable winning opening that is opened in a jackpot game advantageous to the player. In this type of game, it is generally possible to allow a game ball to enter a plurality of routes with a game nail placed on the game board with respect to a variable prize opening. However, if a game ball can enter the variable winning opening through multiple routes, the variable ball can be won after the game ball has been launched according to the state of the game nail placed on the game board or the launch strength of the game ball. Since the time until the game ball enters the mouth is non-uniform, the time required for the big hit game is non-uniform. In addition, when a game ball can enter the variable prize opening through a plurality of paths, the game ball moving along a path different from the plurality of paths becomes a waste ball that is not entered into the variable prize opening. Even if balls are generated, not only the time required for the jackpot game becomes uneven, but also the player is disadvantaged because the number of difference balls in the jackpot game is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 is moved along the same path by the prescribed passage 35, and therefore the game ball 99 is moved with a constant strength (stroke) to the game board 31. In the case of launching in the right side area, the moving speeds of the game balls 99 moving in the prescribed passage 35 are made uniform, and the prescribed passage 35 is moved at a uniform interval. Since the variable winning opening 394 is provided at a position where a game ball moving in the prescribed passage 35 can enter, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region, the game ball 99 is launched in the round game of the big hit game. And the time from when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 394 is made uniform, and generation of useless balls is prevented. Therefore, the end condition (third predetermined condition) of the jackpot game round game is that the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) has elapsed and the variable winning opening 394 as described above. If any of the upper limit number (10) of the game balls 99 is filled, the variable ball opening is moved by moving the game balls 99 along the same path through the prescribed passage 35. Since the game balls 99 are uniformly placed in the 353 (variable winning opening 394), the time required for the round game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the jackpot game can be made uniform. As a result, when the game per game is executed, the time required for the game cycle of the game play of the game per game, the game play of the jackpot game and the game of the jackpot game is made uniform. It becomes easy to end the jackpot game within the interval. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the opening of the electric winning winning door 371 during the execution of the jackpot game and the start of the execution of the game per bonus. For this reason, in the game per hit, the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed due to the fact that the game hit ball 99 is executed even though the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376, V Occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of a prize at the V prize opening 384 due to the fact that a jackpot game is being executed despite the game ball 99 having entered the prize opening 384, In the role opening / closing game, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the variable winning port 394 due to the opening of the electric winning port 376.

  In particular, in the gaming machine 10, the electric winning device 37 and the V winning device 38 are arranged at positions where the game ball 99 moving in the prescribed passage 35 can enter, and the electric winning device 37 in the game per game is arranged. The operating time of the bonus winning door 371 and the operating time of the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game are fixed. As a result, it becomes even easier to equalize the time required for the game cycle of the electric power opening and closing game, the small hit game and the big hit game of the game per hit. Therefore, since it becomes much easier to finish the big hit game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371, it is possible to more reliably suppress the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, when the variable winning opening 394 is opened by moving the variable winning door 391 provided in the defined passage 35 to the operating position, the variable winning opening 394 is moved to reach a position where the variable winning opening 394 can be entered. All of the game balls 99 that have been played can be made to enter the variable winning opening 394. For this reason, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that may occur when a configuration in which the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394 through a plurality of paths, that is, generation of useless balls that do not enter the variable winning opening 394. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage due to the useless balls that are not entered into the variable winning opening 394, for example, the reduction of the number of difference balls.

  Further, when the electric winning award door 371 or the V winning door 384 or the normal winning opening 385 is opened by moving the electric winning award door 371 or the V winning door 381 provided in the specified passage 35 to the operating position. All of the game balls 99 that have moved through the passage 35 and reached the positions where they can enter the electric winning prize opening 376, or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385, are placed in the electric winning prize opening 376 or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 384. The winning opening 385 can be entered. Therefore, inconveniences that may occur when a configuration in which the game ball 99 can enter the electric winning prize opening 376, or the V winning prize opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 through a plurality of routes, that is, the electric winning prize opening 376, or It is possible to prevent the useless balls that are not entered into the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 from occurring. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage due to the useless balls that are not entered in the electric winning prize opening 376, or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385, for example, reduction of the number of difference balls.

  In the gaming machine 10, the electric winning device 37, the V winning device 38 and the variable winning device 39 are provided in the right region of the game board 31, and the winning ports 376, 384, 394 of these devices 37 to 39 have games. A game ball 99 that is launched into the right area of the board 31 and moves through the specified passage 35 can enter. On the other hand, a through ball 317 that gives an opportunity to operate the electric prize winning device 37 (a game is executed per usual figure) allows a game ball 99 launched to the left area of the game board 31 to pass therethrough. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to make a left turn to make the electric winning device 37 and to make a right turn to operate the V winning device 38 and the variable winning device 39. That is, it is disadvantageous for the player until the right to execute the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated (to be precise, the right to execute the game per game in which the electric winning device 37 is operated) is obtained. While it is necessary to make a left turn in the state, it is necessary to make a right turn in a state advantageous to the player after the right is obtained. As a result, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming property that uses left-handed and right-handed depending on whether it is disadvantageous or advantageous to the player.

  The game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor and the radio wave sensor are provided, for example, around the through gate 317 and the variable prize opening 394. The magnet sensor and the radio wave sensor are electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection results of the magnet sensor and the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the through gate 317 or the variable winning opening 394 is performed using a magnet or radio waves, the cheating can be detected. Note that the radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a lottery per usual drawing as a lottery for shifting to a state in which a game per normal figure is set in advance. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to a general winning sensor 313a, a gate passing sensor 317a, an electrical winning sensor 37a, a V winning sensor 38a, a normal winning sensor 38b, a variable winning sensor 39a, and the like. Based on the detection signals from the sensors 313a, 317a, 37a, 38a, 38b, 39a, the MPU 41 has a general winning port 313, a through gate 317, an electric winning port 376, a V winning port 384, a normal winning port 385, a variable amount. It is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the winning opening 394. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 sends to the voice lamp control device 5 a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, a general game start command, a general game start command, a small hit game start command, a V-winning command, a big hit game start command, Commands such as a round game start command, a variable winning interval start command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game end command are output.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal symbol variation display time (the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol display unit 361) and the lottery result in the lottery per common symbol. In the case where the lottery result in is a win, it includes information on the type per hit. When the variation pattern command starts the symbol variation display by the main display unit 36, the variation start process of FIG. 28 described later is performed based on information stored in a later-described general figure storage area 412b (see FIG. 14). In step S1707 or S1709. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the normal variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the lottery per common figure and the type per common figure is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The hold command is a lottery result, variation pattern, and number of holds in the lottery per drawing for the increased hold when the number of holds N stored in the later-described general figure hold storage area 412b (see FIG. 14) increases. N is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of N. The pending command is set in the pending command setting process in step S1205 in the through gate process of FIG. 23 described later based on the information stored in the reserved storage area 412b described later when the number of held N increases. (See FIG. 24 described later).

  The shift command notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the success / failure information indicating the lottery result in the lottery per regular drawing in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 has shifted when the number of reservations decreases. It is a command. The shift command is set in step S1604 in the data setting process of FIG.

  The general figure game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that a general figure game in which a lottery result in a lottery per common figure is notified by the normal symbol display unit 361 is started. The general game start command is set in step S1508 in the general game control process of FIG.

  The game per game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a game per game where the electronic winning device 37 is activated is started. The base game per game start command is set in step S1803 of the base game per game control process of FIG.

  The small hit game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated is started. The small hit game start command is set in step S1902 in the small hit game control process of FIG.

  The V winning command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has won the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38. The V winning command is set in step S1917 in the small hit game control process of FIG.

  A jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is activated is started. The jackpot game start command is set in step S2008 in the jackpot game control process of FIG.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. . The round game start command is set in step S2018 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp that the opening of the jackpot game is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started, but the opening end command is issued at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command. Alternatively, an opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of round games to be started at the time of starting the round game may be set, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The variable winning interval start command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the variable winning interval that is between round games in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game is started. The variable winning interval start command is set in step S2032 of the jackpot game control process of FIG.

  The ending start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is started, that is, the opening / closing execution mode is ended. The ending start command is set in step S2035 of the jackpot game control process of FIG.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is over. The jackpot game end command is set in step S2047 of the jackpot game control process of FIG.

  It should be noted that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, an execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 2 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation, which will be described later, every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the storage area used for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform lottery per special figure, lottery per special figure, setting of the normal figure variable display time, and the like will be described. . Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a and the general map hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 to set lottery per general map, lottery per special map, and general map variable display time. Execute.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a random number counter C1 used for a lottery per common figure for determining whether or not to operate the electronic winning device 37, and a type counter per universal figure used for determining the type per universal figure. When determining the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern) in the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, C2, the extraordinary reach random number counter C3 used when judging the extraordinary figure type And a common figure variation type counter CS used in the above. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1 for normal maps. In addition, the lottery counter 412a determines the random number counter C4 per special figure used for the lottery per special figure when the game ball 99 is entered in the electric prize winning port 376 of the electric prize winning device 37, and the jackpot type A jackpot type counter C5 used in the process and a random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C4 per special figure are included. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C5, CS, CIN1, and CIN2 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at a short time interval by the MPU 41, and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C5, CS, CIN1, and CIN2, and are referred to by the MPU 41 during lottery per ordinary drawing, lottery per special drawing, and setting of a variable display time (setting of a fluctuation pattern command). The

  The usual reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved area RE1, a second reserved area RE2, a third reserved area RE3, a fourth reserved area RE4, an execution area AE, and a reserved number storage area NA. Then, the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is determined based on the various counter values stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4, and the normal symbol display unit 361 displays the standard by variable display and stop display. A normal game for notifying the lottery result in the winning lottery is executed.

  When the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317, the random number counter C1, the universal type counter C2, the unreachable reach random number counter C3, and the universal variable type counter stored in the RAM 412 are stored. Information corresponding to CS is acquired as success / failure information used in lottery per map and stored in one of the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the random number counter C1 per universal figure, the type counter C2 per universal figure, and the unreachable reach random number counter C3, the common variable type counter CS includes the first reserved areas RE1 to fourth. Stored in one of the reserved areas RE4.

  For this reason, in addition to the lottery result of the lottery per ordinary figure for the ordinary figure game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4, the variable display on the normal symbol display unit 361 The variation pattern (variation display time) (the variation pattern of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341) can be determined in advance.

  Specifically, when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area RE1, the second reservation area RE2, the third reservation area RE3, and the fourth reservation area RE4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NA, the number of hold areas in which the validity information is stored among the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 is stored as the hold number N.

  In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the through gate 317 can store up to 4 pieces of success / failure information as the passing history of the game ball 99 by a total of four storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4. It is possible to hold up to one.

  The execution area AE is a memory used to move the validity information stored in the first reserved area RE1 when the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36 is started. It is an area.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines the lottery result in the lottery per common drawing based on the numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE at the start of a single ordinary game. At this time, if the success / failure information of the first reservation area RE1 is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area RE2 is shifted to the first reservation area RE1 and is transferred to the third reservation area RE3. The stored success / failure information is shifted to the second reservation area RE2, and the determination information stored in the fourth reservation area RE4 is shifted to the third reservation area RE3.

  For example, the random number counter C1 per unit is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 199. In particular, when the random number counter C1 per common figure makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 per common figure at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C1 per common figure. The random number initial value counter CIN1 per common figure is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 199) as the random number counter C1 per common figure. The random number counter C1 per map is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. As shown in FIG. 15 (A), in the gaming machine 10, the random number counter C1 per universal figure stored in the reserved storage area 412b is stored in the common winning / bad table storage area stored in the ROM 411. The validity of the value is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the value of the random number that is won per normal game is 0 out of 0-299, and 1-299 is out of the range. In other words, the probability per ordinary figure is 1/300.

  The common type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in the order of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 199. The normal type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. In the gaming machine 10, the per-general type of the value of the per-general type counter C <b> 2 stored in the hold storage area 412 b is determined by the per-general type allocation table stored in the per-normal-type distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. Is judged.

  Here, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of the type allocation table per common map. In the example shown in FIG. 15 (B), seven types A to G per universal map are set as the types per universal map. FIG. 15C is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery results per ordinary map and the display contents on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. FIG. 16 is a view showing an example of an opening / closing pattern of the electric winning prize door 371 in the electric winning prize device 37. In the example shown in FIG. 16, seven opening / closing patterns 1 to 7 are set as opening / closing patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, FIG. 15C, and FIG. 16, A per common figure is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per common figure is 0 to 59 of 0 to 199. The fraction is 30%. When the per-common-call type is “A” per common-drawing, the number 1 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the case of A per game, a game per game is executed in which the electric winning award door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened / closed by the opening / closing pattern 1. In the open / close pattern 1, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed once, and the electric role opening / closing game is executed once. That is, in the common symbol A, both the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) are 1, and they match.

  B per common map is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per common map is 60 to 99 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution ratio is 20%. When the per-common symbol type is “B” per ordinary symbol, the number 2 is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36. In the per game B, a game per game is executed in which the electric winning box 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 2. In the open / close pattern 2, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed twice through one opening interval, and the electric role opening / closing game is executed twice. In other words, in the common symbol B, the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) are 2, and they match.

  The per-normal map C is selected when the value of the per-normal map type counter C2 is 100 to 129 of 0 to 199, and the distribution ratio is 15%. When the per-common symbol type is C per common symbol, the number 3 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36. At the usual figure C, a game per ordinary figure in which the electric prize winning door 371 of the electric prize winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 3 is executed. In the open / close pattern 3, the electric winning prize door 371 of the electric winning prize device 37 is opened and closed three times through an interval between two opening, and the electric role opening / closing game is executed three times. In other words, in the common figure C, the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) are 3, and they match.

  The per-normal map D is selected when the value of the per-normal map type counter C2 is 130-154 out of 0-199, and the distribution ratio is 12.5%. When the per-common symbol type is D per common symbol, the number 4 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the bonus per D, a game per bonus is executed in which the electrified winning door 371 of the electrified winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 4. In the open / close pattern 4, the electric winning prize door 371 of the electric winning prize device 37 is opened and closed four times through an interval between three opening, and the electric winning switch game is executed four times. In other words, in the normal figure D, both the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) are 4, which match.

  E per base map is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per base map is 155 to 174 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution ratio is 10%. When the per-common symbol type is “E” per common symbol, the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 is stopped and displayed with the numeral 5. In the E per game, a game per Era in which the electric winning award door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened / closed by the opening / closing pattern 5 is executed. In the open / close pattern 5, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed 5 times through an interval of 4 open times, and the electric role opening / closing game is executed 5 times. In other words, in the common symbol E, the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening and closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) are 5, and they match.

  F per common map is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per common map is 175 to 189 of 0 to 199, and the distribution ratio is 7.5%. When the per-common symbol type is “F” per ordinary symbol, the number 6 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36. In the usual figure F, a game per ordinary figure in which the electric prize winning door 371 of the electric prize winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 6 is executed. In the open / close pattern 6, the electric winning prize door 371 of the electric winning prize device 37 is opened and closed six times through five open intervals, and the electric winning / opening game is executed six times. That is, in the normal symbol F, the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening and closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) are 6, and they match.

  G per common map is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per common map is 190 to 199 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution ratio is 5%. When the per-general map type is G per-normal map, the number 7 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In G per game, a game per game is executed in which the electric winning box 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened / closed by the opening / closing pattern 7. In the open / close pattern 7, the electric winning award door 371 of the electric winning award device 37 is opened and closed 7 times through 6 open intervals, and the electric open / close game is executed 7 times. In other words, in the general symbol G, the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening and closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) are 7, and they match.

  In addition, when the electric winning winning door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per game, the intervals between releases are all set to be the same or substantially the same. Further, the intervals between the open / close patterns are set to be the same or substantially the same, that is, the interval between the open / close patterns is set to a fixed time regardless of the type of the open / close pattern.

  In this way, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win, as a game per common figure, the electric winning prize door 371 is opened / closed as many times as the type per common figure (electrical opening and closing game is executed). Then, the number that matches the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 as a lottery result in the lottery per ordinary figure. In other words, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win, the number that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 is the number of times of opening and closing the electric winning prize door 371 in the game per common figure (electrical opening and closing game Execution count). Thus, the player can directly and easily determine the number of times the electric character winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric character opening and closing game is executed) in the game per game based on the numbers that are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361. Can grasp. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the electric power open / close game of a game per bonus game will be executed after the end of the jackpot game, so that the degree of interest and interest in the game is improved, and the game per game after the jackpot game ends When the electric role opening / closing game is executed, it can be easily predicted that the game ball 99 needs to enter the electric role winning port 376 of the electric role winning device 37. Since 99 is not entered, the disadvantage that the jackpot game is not executed is more reliably prevented. In addition, in the normal symbol display unit 361, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win, the number corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 (the number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) However, the lottery results in the lottery per common map are not limited to numbers, but other than alphabets, symbols, etc., as long as the content reflects (corresponds) the lottery result in the lottery per common map May be displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per lot is out, the electric prize winning door 371 of the electric prize winning device 37 is not opened and closed (the game is not executed per usual figure), and the main display In the normal symbol display part 361 of the part 36, the numeral 0, 8 or 9 is stopped and displayed.

  Then, based on the values of the random number counter C1 per common figure and the type counter C2 per common figure stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is "A per common figure" Determines whether “B per figure”, “C per common figure”, “D per common figure”, “E per common figure”, “F per common figure”, “G per common figure”, or “Out” To do.

  The normal symbol display unit 361 may display the lottery result in the lottery per symbol by using alphabets, symbols, etc., instead of displaying the numbers indicating the lottery result in the lottery per common symbol. .

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the extraordinary reach random number counter C <b> 3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 238. The unreachable reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317.

  In the gaming machine 10, the variable display stop result type displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the lottery per normal drawing is out of place is selected by the extraordinary reach random number counter C 3. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. After that, the value of the unreachable random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, ie, reach other than front / rear outage that stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete outage that does not generate reach, is set. .

  Here, FIG. 15D is a diagram illustrating an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 15D, the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value that reaches the other than the front / rear out is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out of the range is 39. ~ 238. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win, the MPU 41 determines that the reach has occurred regardless of the value of the extraordinary reach random number counter C3.

  Here, “reach” is a decorative symbol indicating that the lottery result in the lottery per symbol is a win between the start of the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop of the symbol display. This is a fluctuating state that is expected to be a symbol combination. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a game in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation level, or a player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person-participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, and the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The normal fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 199. Specifically, the common symbol variation type counter CS determines the variation pattern type of the normal symbol variation display displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the lottery per common symbol. Is. Further, the variation pattern type is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5, and the sound lamp control device 5 performs a high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect, super reach effect, special reach based on the change pattern type. A rough variation game production type such as production is determined. The normal fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a main process described later is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, the value of the normal variation type counter CS is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 317.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the normal figure fluctuation display time based on the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS and a preset fluctuation pattern table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the fluctuation pattern while referring to the usual pattern fluctuation pattern table or the extraordinary fluctuation pattern table stored in advance in the fluctuation pattern table storage area of the ROM 411.

  Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern table per ordinary figure, and FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating an example of an extraordinary variation pattern table. Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B.

  As shown in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, in the fluctuation pattern table per ordinary figure and the extraordinary fluctuation pattern table, fluctuation patterns are associated in advance according to the value of the common figure fluctuation type counter CS. Yes. Then, the MPU 41 refers to the fluctuation pattern table per ordinary figure when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is “win”, and refers to the fluctuation pattern table outside the usual figure when the lottery result is “out”. Specify the pattern type.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 17A, in the variation pattern table per common drawing, any one of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the common variation variation counter CS. . Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the normal reach production pattern. Is executed (see FIG. 45). The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 performs the super reach production. A pattern is executed (see FIG. 45). The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest change display time of 90 s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the special reach. An effect pattern is executed (see FIG. 45). The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in the unillustrated fluctuation pattern table, each stop type at the time of outage determined by the value of the unintended reach random number counter C3 (front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out). In addition, the correspondence relationship between the normal map variation type counter CS and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of detachment is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth detachment, one of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the normal variation type counter CS Is done. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the normal variation type counter CS. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the part 341 (see FIG. 45). When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a change display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the part 341 (see FIG. 45).

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”. The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach production with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach production executed in the super reach production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”. One of the super-reach productions is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer variation time than normal reach production, and there is a higher probability (expectation) that the lottery result per normal drawing is per normal drawing than normal reach production, which is more common than special reach production. It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (expectation) of winning per figure is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects to be executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”. One of the special reach productions performed is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, for example, an effect that develops from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is suggested to have a higher probability (expectation) of winning per map than the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of full deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “04”, the fluctuation display is off without the notice effect such as a character, a message, etc. Display is executed. In the gaming machine 10, as a fluctuation display at the time of complete deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern is stopped with a notice effect such as a character, a message, etc., and stopped at the symbol. Is executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that in the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which the single operation is reflected in the effect, or the operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which a continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the lottery per regular drawing is displayed. Input to the sound lamp controller 5. Specifically, the MPU 41 outputs a variation pattern command in which alphabets indicating the types per common map are added before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. For example, when the type per map is “A per map”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating the type per map before the change patterns “01” to “03”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is input to the sound lamp control device 5. Similarly, the MPU 41 displays the fluctuation pattern commands “B01” to “B03” when the figure is B per common figure, and the fluctuation pattern commands “C01” to “C03” when the figure is C per common figure. Fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D03” for hit D, fluctuating pattern commands “E01” to “E03” for E per common figure, and fluctuate for F per common figure The pattern commands “F01” to “F03” are input to the sound lamp controller 5 when the pattern command “G01” is “G” per universal map.

  Further, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal map is “miss”, the MPU 41 adds a variation pattern command “H” indicating “displacement” before the variation patterns “01” to “05”. Any one of “H01” to “H05” is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary drawing based on the variation pattern command, and based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. Then, the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces sound from the speaker 26 according to the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 simply determines the variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341 based on the common diagram variation type counter CS and the variation pattern table. It will execute the process. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform lottery per usual drawing. Moreover, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the random number counter C4 per special figure is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 299. The random number counter C4 per special figure is periodically updated and stored in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37. Particularly, when the random number counter C4 per special figure makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per special figure. The random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 299) as the random number counter C4 per special figure. In the random number counter C4 per special figure, 0 out of the random number values 0 to 299 is out, and 1 to 299 is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability is 299/300, and the small hit probability is approximately 100%. On the other hand, unlike the conventional gaming machine, the random number counter C4 per special figure is not set with a random value for which the lottery result is a big hit, and the lottery result is always either a small hit or a miss. Therefore, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated based on the lottery per special drawing is not executed. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a small hit based on the value of the random number counter C4 per special figure stored in the RAM 412 at a predetermined timing, and activates the V winning device 38 if it is a small hit.

  Note that the random number counter C4 per special figure may be changed so that the random number value (0 in the present embodiment) that is out of the range is eliminated and all random number values are small hits. That is, when lottery per special figure is performed based on the random number counter C4 per special figure, it may be possible to win per 100% small. In addition, when a game ball 99 enters the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37, a right to play a small hit game is generated without performing a lottery per special figure based on a random counter C4 per special figure. You may make it make it.

  The jackpot type counter C5 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 39, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 39. The jackpot type counter C5 is periodically updated and stored in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37. Note that the jackpot type counter C5 may be stored in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. In the jackpot type counter C5, 0 to 19 of the random numbers 0 to 39 are 8R jackpots, and 20 to 39 are 16R jackpots. That is, the distribution ratio between 8R jackpot and 16R jackpot is 1: 1. Here, the 8R jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed eight times in the opening / closing execution mode as a jackpot game executed by winning the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, The 16R jackpot is a jackpot where the round game is executed 16 times in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The distribution ratio between the 8R jackpot and the 16R jackpot is not limited to 1; 1, but may be other ratios. The jackpot type may include one or more small jackpots of other round numbers such as 2R jackpot and 5R jackpot instead of or in addition to at least one of 8R jackpot and 16R jackpot. Of course, only one jackpot type may be set, for example, 8R jackpot or 16R jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 18 shows an example of the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the electric winning box 371 of the electric winning device 37 in the game per game and the opening / closing timing of the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 in the jackpot game. It is a time chart which shows. FIG. 18 shows an example in which the electric winning prize winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times as in B to G (opening and closing patterns 2 to 7 (see FIGS. 15B and 16)). Yes. The jackpot game includes an opening and closing execution mode and an ending in which a round game in which the variable winning door 391 is opened is executed a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 is per common figure, the electric winning device 37 of the electric role winning device 37 is played as a game per common figure. By opening / closing the electric role winning door 371, the electric role opening / closing game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric role winning opening 376 is executed one or more times. When a game ball 99 is entered, a small hit game in which the electric winning winning door 371 is opened / closed is executed after the electric open / close game is completed on condition that the lottery result in the special drawing lottery becomes a small win. . When the V winning door 381 is opened and closed in the small winning game, the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning port 384. When the game ball is inserted into the V winning port 384, the small winning game The jackpot game is executed after the end. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure performed by passing the game ball 99 to the through gate 317 is a win, Win games and jackpot games can be executed in this order as a series of game cycles. And when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is B to G per common figure where the electric prize winning door 371 of the electric prize winning device 37 is opened and closed several times, until the next electric role opening and closing game is started When the jackpot game can be ended, the game cycle can be executed again in response to the start of the electric opening / closing game. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the profit cycle of the number corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing the electric winning door 371 is performed in one game per figure executed when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win. As a result of being repeatedly executed, it is possible to repeatedly execute the jackpot game of the number corresponding to the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 in a game per game. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, the operation time of the electric winning door 371 in the game for opening and closing the game per game and the operation time of the V winning door 381 in the game per game are set to be relatively short as described above. Therefore, in the game cycle, the time required for the opening / closing execution game and the small hit game per game is relatively short, and it is possible to repeatedly execute the big hit game at short intervals.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the electrification winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times in B to G per usual figure, the interval time between opening of the electrified prize winning door 371 (by the electrified prize winning door 371 in the game per ordinary figure The time during which the entry into the electric winning prize opening 376 is restricted is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game. In other words, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is set to be equal to or less than the time of the interval between releases, and the jackpot game is set to end in the interval between releases. Here, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game, the opening time, and for all round games at the 16R jackpot, the upper limit number (maximum winning number) of game balls 99 enters the variable winning slot 394. The total round game time (maximum open time × 16), the interval time between round games, and the ending in the case of a full open that ends with the elapse of the maximum open time of the variable prize opening 353 (variable prize opening 394) It is the total time of time. Specifically, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is also affected by the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game executed before the jackpot game in the interval between releases, but is substantially the same as the interval time between releases or the interval between releases, for example. Is preferably set to be not less than 0.8 times and not more than 0.99 times of the interval between opening times, more preferably not less than 0.85 times and not more than 0.95 times of the interval time between opening times. Is done. By setting the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 353 in the round game within such a range, even if the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is finished in the interval between the open games, By the operation of the winning combination door 371, it is possible to finish the jackpot game before the electric opening / closing game is started.

  In the present embodiment, the number of opening of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning port 394) in each round game of the jackpot game (8R jackpot game and 16R jackpot game) is one, and the maximum opening time is the same. Set to time. Therefore, the ease of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in each round game (the time required for each round game) is defined to be the same or substantially the same. Of course, the maximum opening time of one or more round games may be different from that of other round games, or the variable prize opening 353 (variable prize opening 394) may be opened multiple times in one or more round games. Good. In other words, the ease of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in one or more round games (the time required for the round game) is the same as that of the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in another round game. The ease of entering the ball (the time required for the round game) may be set differently.

  In the gaming machine 10, the interval between opening times is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the total time of the theoretical maximum time for the small hit game and the theoretical maximum time for the big hit game. In other words, the theoretical maximum time for the jackpot game is preferably set to be equal to or less than the time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time for the small hit game from the time between the open intervals. Specifically, the theoretical maximum time of jackpot game is set to be approximately the same as the remaining time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of small hit game from the time between intervals, or preferably less than or equal to the time between intervals. The interval time is set to be 0.8 times to 1 time, preferably 0.9 times to 1 time. By setting the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 353 in the round game within such a range, even if the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is finished in the interval between the open games, By the operation of the winning combination winning door 371, the jackpot game can be surely ended before the electric role opening / closing game is started.

  In addition, when the electric winning box door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per game, all the intervals between the opening of the electric winning door 371 are set to the same or substantially the same time. In addition, the interval between opening of the electronic winning door 371 is also set to the same or substantially the same time in the plurality of opening / closing patterns. In other words, the interval between the opening of the electrical winning door 371 is fixed at the same or substantially the same time regardless of the opening / closing pattern type and the opening / closing timing.

  In the gaming machine 10, the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game is a predetermined time that is determined in advance as a time during which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning portion 382 as described above. However, when at least one of opening and ending is performed in the small hit game, a value obtained by adding the predetermined time to the time required for the opening or ending is the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, as described above, the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 353 in the round game is set to be equal to or less than the minimum time required for the maximum number of game balls 99 to enter the variable prize opening 394. However, it is also conceivable to set a time exceeding the theoretical minimum time that the upper limit number of game balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394. Specifically, the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 353 (variable prize opening 394) in a round game is, for example, the above upper limit number (for example, 10) to the game ball launch interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The multiplied time (for example, 6 seconds) is set, preferably set to more than 1 time and 1.5 times or less, more preferably set to 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times the theoretical minimum time.

  When the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) in the round game is set to a time exceeding the theoretical minimum time that the upper limit number of gaming balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394. When the upper limit number of game balls 99 are inserted into the variable winning opening 394 before the maximum opening time elapses, the possibility that the round game will be finished is increased. Then, when the round game is ended by placing the upper limit number of game balls 99 in the variable winning opening 394 before the maximum opening time elapses, the time required for the round game is rounded by the elapse of the maximum opening time. Since the game is shorter than when the game is ended, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened. Therefore, by reducing the time required for the jackpot game, it is possible to easily end the jackpot game in the interval between opening and closing of the winning combination winning door 371 (electric opening and closing game). Therefore, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times as a normal game, it is possible to easily execute a plurality of jackpot games.

  Also, by ending the jackpot game at the interval between opening and closing of the electric winning box door 371 (electric role opening and closing game), the interval between opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 (electric role opening and closing game) is increased during the execution of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game is finished, it is possible to prevent the start of the electric open / close game in the bonus game. As a result, there is a situation in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning prize opening 376 in the normal winning game, Occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of the winning to the V prize opening 384 because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384, It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot enter the variable prize opening 394 due to the opening of the electric prize winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game.

  Further, when the round game is ended by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable prize opening 394 before the maximum opening time elapses, the game balls 99 entered into the variable prize opening 394 in the round game 99 The number is increased as compared to the case where the round game is terminated due to the elapse of the maximum opening time. Therefore, the player can acquire the maximum number of game balls 99 in the round game, and the number of game balls 99 that can be acquired in the jackpot game increases. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player that can occur when the round game is terminated due to the elapse of the maximum opening time, that is, the decrease in the number of game balls 99 that can be acquired, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

  In addition, the maximum opening time is set to be more than the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99 by the upper limit number (for example, 10), and preferably When it is set to more than 1 time and 1.5 times or less of the time multiplied by the number, and more preferably 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less, the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 394 When the round game is ended by being balled, it is possible to prevent the time required for the round game from becoming significantly shorter than the maximum opening time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the jackpot game from being significantly shortened. Therefore, when the electric switch opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times per game, the next electric switch opening / closing game is performed after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to shorten the blank period that occurs before starting.

  By the way, when the blank period becomes longer, it is assumed that the player makes a stop to stop the launch of the game ball 99 in order to prevent the decrease of the possessed game ball due to the launch of the game ball 99. If a stop-off is performed during the blank period until the electric role opening / closing game is started, the launch of the game ball 99 is delayed with respect to the start of the electric role opening / closing game, etc. There may be a situation in which the game ball 99 is not entered, and as a result, the jackpot game that can acquire a large amount of game balls 99 is not executed. On the other hand, since the blank period can be shortened, stoppage in the blank period can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game due to a delay in launching the game ball 99, and thus it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed.

  Here, when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is A per common figure, a game per universal figure in which the electric winning winning door 371 is opened and closed once is executed. Then, on the condition that the game ball 99 enters the electric role winning opening 376 in the game per ordinary figure by opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 once, and the lottery result in the lottery per special figure is win, The small hit game is executed after the end of the electric role opening / closing game by opening / closing the electric winning door 371, and the big hit game after the end of the small hit game on condition that the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 384 in the small hit game Is executed. In other words, in the common figure A in which one electric role opening / closing game is executed by opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 once, the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 (electric The small hit game and the big hit game can be executed in correspondence with the number of executions of the role opening / closing game.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is other than A per common figure, that is, B to G per common figure, the electric winning prize door 371 is opened and closed several times, so that a game per multiple times is opened and closed. The electric role opening and closing game is executed. And in the BG per game where a plurality of electric power open / close games are executed, the small win game and the big win game triggered by the opening / closing of the electric character winning door 371 other than the final electric open / close game are per This is executed in the interval between opening of the game electric winning door 371. In other words, in the bonus game B to G, the bonus game and the bonus game are executed while the bonus game is being executed, and the bonus game 371 is opened / closed in the final electrical game opening / closing game. And the jackpot game is executed after the end of the game per game as in the case of A per game. In other words, in the case of B to G per common figure, a plurality of times corresponding to the number of times of opening / closing the power winning door 371 (number of times of executing the power winning / closing game) including the interval between opening of the power winning door 371 is performed. Bonus games and jackpot games can be executed. In addition, as described above, in the common figure A, one small hit game and big hit game can be executed after the end of the common figure game. That is, in any of A to G per figure, the opening / closing of the electric prize winning door 371 is performed for one game per figure executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win. The number of small hit games and big hit games corresponding to the number of times (the number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) can be executed. In the gaming machine 10, the bonus game is terminated in the interval between releases as described above in B to G, in which a plurality of electric role opening / closing games are executed by opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 multiple times. Therefore, a gaming machine having a novel gaming property is provided in which a jackpot game can be executed a plurality of times at short intervals according to a single ordinary figure. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the small hit game and the big hit game can be executed in the number of times corresponding to the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 in the game per game (number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game). On the other hand, in the case of A to G per common figure, the electric winning prize door is in the order of G per common figure, F per common figure, E per common figure, D per common figure, C per common figure, B per common figure, and A per common figure. 371 has a large number of times of opening / closing (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game). Therefore, in the case of A to G per universal figure, G per universal figure, F per universal figure, E per universal figure, D per universal figure, C per universal figure, B per universal figure, and A per universal figure are expected in this order. The number of jackpot games is large, and the expected value of the game ball 99 is also increased. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while expecting to win the game with a larger number of times of opening and closing the electric role winning door 371, so that the interest of the game is improved. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution ratio decreases in the order of G per universal figure, F per universal figure, E per universal figure, D per universal figure, C per universal figure, B per universal figure, and A per universal figure. (See FIG. 15B). In other words, as the type of hit per game, the expected number of jackpot games is large, and it is difficult to select the hit per game that is advantageous to the player. In this way, by making it difficult to select a map that is advantageous to the player, the joy of winning for each type of map that is difficult to select increases, so the interest of the game is further improved.

  In addition, when the lottery result in the normal drawing lottery is a win, the number that is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 361 has a correlation with the type per normal drawing (see FIGS. 15B and 15C). ). Therefore, the player can grasp the type (the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game)) by the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361. Further, by grasping the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 in the game per game (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game), it is possible to grasp the maximum execution number of the jackpot game that is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls 99. It becomes like this. As a result, the gameability that can grasp the maximum number of executions of the jackpot game, which is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls 99, is added, thereby increasing the degree of interest and interest of the game and making the game more motivated. It becomes possible to improve. Furthermore, for example, it is possible to predict whether or not the electric role opening / closing game in which the electric role winning door 371 is opened in the game per bonus game is executed after the end of the jackpot game, so that the attention and interest in the game is improved, and the jackpot When the electric role opening / closing game is executed after the game ends, it can be predicted that it is necessary to enter the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376, and therefore the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric role winning opening 376. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the jackpot game is not executed.

  In the gaming machine 10, the interval time between the opening of the electric winning door 371 is set to be greater than or equal to the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game, and is not less than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game and the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game. Set to Therefore, even if all round games in the jackpot game are ended as full open, it is possible to end not only the jackpot game but also the jackpot game in the interval between the opening of the electric role winning door 371. . Thereby, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is prevented that the interval between the opening of the electric role winning door 371 ends and the electric winning winning door 371 is opened and closed. As a result, there is a situation in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning prize opening 376 in the normal winning game, Occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of the winning to the V prize opening 384 because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384, It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot enter the variable prize opening 394 due to the opening of the electric prize winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one in which a jackpot game lottery probability is increased after a jackpot game executed with a chance jackpot or the like as a trigger. In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which it is easy to enter a game ball into an electric winning prize port by supporting an electric accessory member after a big hit game. In such a conventional gaming machine, the probability of winning a jackpot lottery after the jackpot game is increased, or the game ball is easily put into the electric winning award, and the time is shortened. It is expected that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot in a relatively short time and the jackpot game will be executed.

  However, with conventional gaming machines, it is expected that a jackpot game will be executed in a relatively short period of time, but even with a high probability jackpot lottery, it will take a lot of lottery times to become a jackpot, There is a case where a so-called humiliation occurs that takes time before a game is executed. In addition, even if it is easy to enter the game ball into the electric winning prize opening, it is possible that the number of game balls may decrease during the jackpot game. Therefore, in a conventional gaming machine, even if it is in a state advantageous to the player such as a probable big hit, the player may be stressed, which causes a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, two types of jackpot lottery tables, a jackpot lottery table for a non-probability variation state (normal state) and a jackpot lottery table for a probability variation state, are required to realize the probability variation state. . In addition, as a normal symbol lottery table for lottery per universal figure to operate the electric accessory member to realize the short-time mode, the lottery table per non-temporary regular drawing and the table per hour chart for normal hours Two types of lottery tables are required. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine is disadvantageous in terms of storage capacity because it requires a lot of lottery tables, and the processing burden is large because both the big hit determination process and the normal hit determination process are required. .

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot games are played multiple times in B to G where a plurality of times of electric power opening and closing games are executed by opening and closing the power winning winning door 371 a plurality of times. Even if executed, the next jackpot game is executed at a relatively short interval as described above. Further, the start timing of the jackpot game is started at a timing that is made uniform after the end of the electric role opening / closing game. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, so-called humming does not occur, and jackpot games are repeated at uniform intervals, so it may also stress the player when it is advantageous for the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of lottery tables, a winning / failing table per normal drawing and a winning / failing table per special drawing, and a game can be progressed with a smaller number of lottery tables than in conventional gaming machines. Therefore, not only is the storage capacity advantageous, but the processing load for the lottery is small.

  Here, FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information related to game history, play performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes, as game information, “out ball number”, “general winning port payout ball number”, “electric role winning port payout ball number”, and “V winning port payout ball number”. In addition, “normal winning award payout ball number”, “variable winning award payout ball number”, “base information”, “continuous character ratio information”, and “actual character ratio information” are stored. Among these pieces of game information, “base information”, “continuous character ratio information”, and “character ratio information” correspond to game information (performance information) related to the game performance.

  “Number of out balls” means a normal game state in which a normal game is executed in which a lottery result is clearly shown in the standard lottery (a state in which none of the normal game, small bonus game or big bonus game is executed) ) Is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31. This “number of out balls” is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 22 described later. Note that the “out ball count” is cleared to 0 ball when the “out ball count” reaches 60000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described later (step S2104: Yes) (step S2108). .

  The “general winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state. This “general winning opening payout ball number” is the prize ball command in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25 described later when the general winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning opening 313 in the ordinary game state. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 313 in the setting process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out this time. To do.

  The “number of electrified winning award payout balls” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the electrified winning award port 376 in a game per game where the electrified winning device 37 is operated. This “number of electrified winning prize payout balls” is determined in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25 described later when a prize winning to the electrified prize winning port 376 is detected by the electrified prize winning sensor 37a in a game per game. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize winning to the electric winning prize opening 376 in the prize ball command setting process, the number of balls to be paid out by the current prize is added. Update to the specified value.

  The “V winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated. This “V winning opening payout ball number” is the setting of the winning ball command in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25 described later when a winning to the V winning opening 384 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a in the small hit game. In the processing, when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls in accordance with winning in the V winning opening 384, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out in this winning. .

  The “normal payout payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the normal payout opening 385 in the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated. This “ordinary winning hole payout ball number” is set in the winning ball command setting in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25 described later when the winning in the normal winning hole 385 is detected by the normal winning sensor 38b in the small hit game. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the normal winning opening 385 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out this time. .

  The “variable winning award payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 394 in the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated. This “variable winning award payout ball number” is the winning ball command setting process in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25 described later when the variable winning sensor 39a detects a winning in the variable winning opening 394 in the jackpot game. When the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning at the variable winning opening 394 is set, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning.

  “Base information” is information related to “base”, which is a payout rate (outgoing rate) in the usual game state, and this “base” is “general prize opening payout ball” for the “out ball number” in the usual game state. Number "ratio. When “base” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “base” = 100 × “number of payout balls for general winning a prize” / “number of balls for out”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the last 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described later (steps S2105 and S2106). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is Each time as the 60,000 coin base B2, the game information is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls (step S2103), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes “current base BL”, “previous 60,000 base B1” and “previous 60,000 base B2”, and the past 60,000 bases are recorded in history. However, you may make it leave the past 60,000 bases more than three times as a history. Further, the “base information” may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

  “Consecutive character ratio information” is based on winning to all winning holes (general winning port 313, electric winning port 376, V winning port 384, normal winning port 385, and variable winning port 394) for which a prize ball is paid out. This is information relating to the “continuous character ratio”, which is the ratio of the number of payouts at the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls. When the “continuous character ratio” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “continuous character ratio” = 100 × “variable winning award payout ball number” / “total payout ball number”. The “continuous character ratio information” is updated in step S2109 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. In the present embodiment, the “continuous character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative continuous character ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. “Consecutive character ratio information” is executed for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of times per ordinary figure (for example, 100 times), or for a certain number of lotteries (for example, 1000 times) per ordinary figure in the ordinary figure game state). It may be a ratio of consecutive actors for a period until the number of balls is reached, a period until the number of balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a certain number of periods.

  “Composition ratio information” is the total of winning prizes to all winning awards (general winning entry 313, electronic winning entry 376, V winning entry 384, normal winning entry 385 and variable winning entry 394). Information on “Property ratio”, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the total number of payout balls, the number of payout balls for the V prize port, the number of balls paid out for the normal prize port, and the number of balls paid out for the variable prize port. It is. When the “role ratio” is expressed by a mathematical expression, the “ratio of bonuses” = 100 × (“number of balls to be paid out in the winning role” + “number of balls to be paid out in the V prize port” + “number of balls in the normal prize port” + “variable The number of balls paid out at the winning opening ”) /“ the total number of balls paid out ”. “Composition item ratio information” is updated in step S2109 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. In the present embodiment, the “combination item ratio information” is stored as the accumulated combination rate from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. Note that the “role ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of times per base figure (for example, 100 times), a certain number of lotteries per base figure (for example, 1000 times) in the base figure game state). It is also possible that the ratio of the bonus to the number of out balls is a certain ratio (for example, the period until the number of balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the “community ratio information” may include both the cumulative ratio and the ratio of a certain period of time.

  Here, FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4 </ b> A of the main control device 4. As shown in FIG. 20, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43 and a performance display switch 44.

  The performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” in the gaming machine 10 and is provided at a position where the inner frame 12 can be viewed in a state where the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the main display unit 36.

  The 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment display 431-434, when displaying the alphabet "B", the dot is lit to display "8." to distinguish it from the numeral "8", and the alphabet "D" is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number “0”, the dot is lit and displayed as “0.”. In addition, when displaying any of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to light a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display “base type” as an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segment displays The display units 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbols “BL” of the current base BL are “8.”, “L” in the left two 7-segment indicators 431 and 432 that are identification segments. The base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” in the right two 7-segment indicators 433 and 434 that are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434, “8.”, “L”, “3”, and “1” are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434) at the same time by a pressing operation. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power supply is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When an operation to turn on the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation to turn off the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the energization to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main controller 4.

  Here, FIG. 21A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the base information is not displayed because the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 are in the off state. As shown in FIGS. 21B to 21D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is used as “base information” unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The base is looped in order of the ball base B1 → the previous 60,000 ball base B2 → the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 21B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 21C, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% before the last time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B 1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B 2, and the performance display monitor 43 A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. In addition, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of “base information” or in addition to “base information”, it is stored in a game information storage area 412d such as “continuous character ratio information” and “character ratio information”. Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 13, the sub control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a voice used for a general-game variable game effect, a game effect per universal game, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 when executing the below-mentioned usual-game variable game effect and game-per-game effect. .

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5 change pattern command, hold command, shift command, multi-game game start command, multi-game game start command, small-hit game start command, V-winning command, jackpot game start Commands such as a command, a round game start command, a variable winning interval start command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game end command are input. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26 and an electrical decoration unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, an image game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341, and a sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on a command input from the main control device 4. Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, stops the decorative symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 45), and effect pattern type (see FIG. 46). ) Is transmitted, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see step S2506 in the general game effect processing of FIG. 44), and symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is started. . At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, there are a plurality of types of images such as a variation symbol such as a decorative symbol used in symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a per-drawing effect image, and a miss effect image. It is remembered. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variation pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of the change symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount of money that is lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32 increases as the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, description of the startup process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 22, in step S <b> 1101, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor connected to the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines the detection states of the general winning sensor 313a, the electric winning prize sensor 37a, the V winning sensor 38a, the normal winning sensor 38b, the variable winning sensor 39a, the gate passing sensor 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the like. When a game ball entry is detected, the information is stored in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Further, when an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. To do. Note that the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d reaches 60,000 balls and is cleared to 0 balls when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was calculated (step S2108 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36). reference).

<Step S1102>
Next, in step S1102, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counter CIN1 per universal figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counter CIN1 per ordinary figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0.

<Step S1103>
Subsequently, in step S1103, the MPU 41 updates the random number counter C1 per universal figure, the type counter C2 per universal figure, the unreachable random number counter C3, the random number counter C4 per special figure, and the big hit type counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values in the random number counter C1 per universal figure, the type counter C2 per common figure, the unreachable random number counter C3, the random number counter C4 per special figure, and the big hit type counter C5. When the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to zero.

<Step S1104>
Next, in step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the time counter. Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time counter when the time counter is set in the RAM 412. In the present embodiment, as a time counter, a variable display time counter (step S1706 in FIG. 28), an electric winning prize door time counter (see step S1807 in FIG. 29), an interval time counter between releases (see step S1820 in FIG. 30), V winning door opening time counter (see step S1909 in FIG. 31), opening time counter (see step S2010 in FIG. 33), variable winning door opening time counter (see step S2017 in FIG. 33), variable winning interval time counter (see FIG. 34). In step S2031, the ending time counter (see step S2034 in FIG. 34) and the like are set.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process for drawing whether or not to operate the electric winning device 37 on the basis of the normal winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE of the usual figure storage area 412b. . Details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
Thereafter, in step S1106, the MPU 41 executes a firing control process. In the launch control process, the game ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process of enabling In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the through gate process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gate 317. Here, when the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1201: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1202, and when the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S1201: No), The through gate process ends.

<Steps S1202 and S1203>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 ends the through gate process when the number N of holds is the maximum number of holds (step S1202: Yes). On the other hand, when the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1202: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1203), and the process proceeds to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 updates the values of the random number counter C1 per common figure, the type counter C2 per common figure, and the extraordinary random number counter C3 updated in step S1103 of FIG. The figure variation type counter CS is acquired, and the value is stored in the first empty reserved area (Nth reserved area REN) among the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 of the general figure reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1204 is the target of the success / failure information before being subject to the determination of success / failure per common chart in the change start process (S1507 in FIG. 26, FIG. 28) described later. The content is confirmed, and a pending command setting process for setting a pending command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Details of the hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Hold command setting process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1205 in the through gate process of FIG. Note that the hold command includes information such as a lottery result in a lottery per ordinary figure (per or ordinary figure), a variation pattern, and the number N of pending. Hereinafter, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NA of the general figure hold storage area 412b and also reads the value of the random number counter C1 per map stored in the Nth hold area REN ( Step S1301).

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 reads the per-usual success / failure table (see FIG. 15A), and based on the per-usual success / failure table, the value of the per-usual random number counter C1 read from the RAM 412 in step S1301. Whether or not is a value corresponding to the winning is executed. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the value of the random number counter C1 per common map read from the RAM 412 is a value corresponding to the win (step S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1303, If it is determined that the value is not a corresponding value (step S1302: No), the process proceeds to step S1305.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the common figure type counter C <b> 2 and the common figure fluctuation type counter CS from the RAM 412. For example, if the success / failure information is stored in the third reservation area RE3 in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 23, the per-map type counter C2 included in the success / failure information stored in the third reservation area RE3 and The counter value of the common variable type counter CS is read. Of the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 in the ordinary reserved storage area 412b, the reserved area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 23 is stored in the reserved number storage area NA. Judgment can be made by the value of the holding number N.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 determines the type per map based on the value of the number of reservations N stored in the storage number storage area NA and the values of the type counter C2 and the map variable type counter CS read in step S1303. And the normal map change type is set to the hold command. As described above, since the hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1301, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the hold command refers to the hold number N included in the hold command. It is possible to recognize whether the hold command corresponds to the corresponding hold information stored in any of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4.

<Steps S1305 and S1306>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 reads out the values of the unreachable random number counter C3 and the normal variation type counter CS from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 determines the hold reach number stored in the hold number storage area NA, the unreachable reach random number counter C3 and the normal change variable type counter CS read in step S1303, and the unreachable reach type and the normal change type. The hold command is set (step S1306).

  Note that the hold command set in the hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and other processes are performed in the external output process in step S 1401 in the main process shown in FIG. After being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with the command, it is deleted. Furthermore, the content of the hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is also conceivable that part or all of the information on the pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes are executed for the progress of the multi-game, the multi-game, the small game, and the big game. In the main process, the processes of steps S1401 to S1409 are executed as periodic processes with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S1410 to S1412 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1401 to S1409 to the next period. The

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1401, the MPU 41 sends output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 22 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output process to be sent to. For example, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, a general game start command, a multi-game play start command, a small hit game start command, a V-winning command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a variable winning interval When a command such as a start command, an ending start command, or a jackpot game end command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in a prize ball command setting process in step S1402 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 has received a prize at the general prize opening 313, the electric winning prize opening 376, the V prize opening 384, the normal prize opening 385, and the variable prize opening 394 based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Determine whether or not. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal game state, the MPU 41 pays out the number of the general winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the winning is generated in the general winning opening 313 according to the current winning. Update to the value with the number of balls added. In addition, in the case of a game per game, the MPU 41 determines the number of the second winning port payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in accordance with the current winning when the winning is generated in the electric role winning port 376. Update the value to the number of balls to be paid out. Further, in the small hit game, when a winning is generated in the V winning opening 384 or the normal winning opening 385, the number of the V winning opening payout balls or the normal winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out in this winning. Further, in the jackpot game, when a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 394, the MPU 41 uses the variable winning opening payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the number of payout balls due to the current winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 executes a general game control process for controlling a general game. The details of the general-purpose game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. In the general-purpose game control process, a lottery is performed per general figure, and the contents of the general-purpose hold storage area 412b are updated. In addition, a variation pattern command necessary for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a game-per-game control process for controlling the operation of the electric winning device 37 in a game per game. Note that the details of the game control process for each normal game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a small hit game control process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. The details of the small hit game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the operation of the variable winning device 39 in the jackpot game. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the main display unit 36 (see FIGS. 4 to 6). For example, the MPU 41 controls the general game reservation number display unit 362 according to the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NA (see FIG. 14) of the general purpose reservation storage area 412b. Specifically, when the number of holdings N is 4, control is performed to turn on all four LED lamps of the holding display unit 362. When the number of holdings N is 3, the four LED lamps of the holding display unit 362 are controlled. Control is performed to turn on the other three LED lamps while turning off the remaining one LED lamp. When the number of holdings N is 2, two of the four LED lamps of the holding display unit 362 are turned on. Control is performed to turn off the remaining two LED lamps while turning on, and when the number of holdings N is 1, one of the four LED lamps of the holding display unit 362 is turned on while the remaining three LED lamps are turned on. Control is performed to turn off one LED lamp, and when the number N of holds is 0, control is performed to turn off all four LED lamps of the hold display unit 362. Thereby, the player can know the number of reserves of the right of the variable display in the normal symbol display part 361 based on a lottery per common figure.

  Further, the MPU 41 executes control of the special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. Specifically, the MPU 41 detects a random number counter C4 per special figure and a big hit type counter C5 (FIG. 17C) when the game ball 99 is detected to enter the electric prize winning port 376 of the electric prize winning device 37. And a number corresponding to the value of FIG. 17D) is displayed on the special symbol display portion 363. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the number 3 when the jackpot type is 8R jackpot, the number 7 when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot, and the numbers other than the numbers 3 and 7 when the jackpot type is off. That is, 0, 1, 2, 4-6, 8, or 9 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 363 (see FIG. 17E).

  In addition, control with respect to the normal symbol display part 361 of the main display part 36 is performed in the common figure game control process of FIGS. 26-28 mentioned later.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process for displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process in step S1408 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main process execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1410: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1401, and executes each process after S1401 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1410: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until the time until the execution timing of the next main process is determined (step S1410: Yes), step S1410 to step S1412 are repeatedly executed.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counter CIN1 per universal figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counter CIN1 per ordinary figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value Is cleared to 0. In step S1412, the MPU 41 updates the general fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the normal variation type counter CS, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

[General game control process]
In the general game control process, a process for advancing a general game in which the lottery result in the general game lottery is performed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 is executed. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general game control process executed in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the general game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ordinary game running flag is set to ON. The ordinary figure game execution flag is a flag indicating that the ordinary figure game is being executed, that is, that the ordinary symbol is changing in the normal symbol display unit 361, and is a step in the change start process of FIG. 28 described later. It is set to ON in S1711. The MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509 when the ordinary game execution flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), and when the ordinary game execution flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), the process proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
In step S1502, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game executing flag per game is set to ON. The game-per-game playing flag indicates that a game per game where a game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric role winning port 376 by opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is being executed. This flag is set to ON in step S1802 in the per-game game control process of FIG. 29 described later. When the game execution flag per game is set to ON (step S1502: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the game operation control process and the game execution flag per game is set to OFF. In the case (step S1502: No), the process proceeds to step S1503. That is, the ordinary game is not executed while the game per ordinary figure is being executed.

<Step S1503>
In step S1503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small hit game executing flag is set to ON. The small hit game execution flag indicates that a small hit game in which a game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning port 384 by opening and closing the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 is being executed. This flag is set to ON in step S1903 in the small hit game control process of FIG. When the small hit game in progress flag is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the conventional game control process, and when the small hit game execution flag is set to OFF ( In step S1503: No), the process proceeds to step S1504. That is, the ordinary game is not executed while the small hit game is being executed.

<Step S1504>
In step S1504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON. The jackpot game running flag indicates that a jackpot game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable prize opening 394 by opening and closing the variable prize door 391 of the variable prize device 39 a plurality of times is executed. This flag is set to ON in step S2007 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. When the jackpot gaming flag is set on (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the ordinary game control process, and when the jackpot gaming running flag is set off (step S1504). : No), the process proceeds to step S1505. That is, the ordinary game is not executed during the jackpot game.

<Step S1505>
When all of the usual game playing flag, the game running per flag, the small game running flag, the big hit game running flag, and the common game starting flag are set to OFF (in steps S1501 to S1504) No) in all, that is, when none of the ordinary game, the game per universal game, the small bonus game or the big bonus game is being executed and no game is scheduled to be started per game, the MPU 41 is suspended It is determined whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA of the storage area 412b is 0 (step S1505). The MPU 41 terminates the ordinary game control process when the number of holds N is 0 (step S1505: Yes), and when the number of holds N is not 0 (step S1505: No), the process proceeds to step S1506. .

<Steps S1506 to S1508>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes the data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b, and further causes the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the validity information. The fluctuation start process is executed (step S1507). Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, and details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets a general game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1508), and ends the general game control process. The general game start command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the universal game variation effect is started in the symbol display unit 341 or the like.

<Step S1509>
When the normal game playing flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the variable display time after the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 is started. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S1509). When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1510, and when the variable display time has not elapsed. (Step S1509: No), the ordinary game control process is terminated.

<Step S1510>
When the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 started in step S1708 of the fluctuation start process of FIG. A normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary figure corresponding to the ordinary figure game is stopped and displayed (step S1510). For example, the MPU 41 displays numbers 1 to 7 according to the type per universal symbol as normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 when the result of the lottery per common symbol is winning. Further, when the lottery result in the lottery per regular drawing is out of place, any number of 0, 8, and 9 is displayed as a normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361. Thereby, the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary drawing is clearly shown in the normal symbol display unit 361, and the player can know the result of the lottery per usual drawing.

<Steps S1511 to S1513>
In step S1511, the MPU 41 sets the normal game playing flag off, and further determines whether or not the normal game hit flag is set on (step S1512). Here, the common symbol flag is a flag indicating that the lottery result in the common symbol lottery for the normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol display unit 361 stopped and displayed in step S1510 is a win. In step S1703 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 28, the normal symbol is set to ON at the start of fluctuation. When the usual figure hit flag is set to ON (step S1512: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the usual figure hit game start flag to ON (step S1513), and ends the usual figure game control process. This is a flag for starting a game per game start flag, and is referred to when determining whether or not to start a game per game in step S1801 in the game control process per game shown in FIG. 29 described later. On the other hand, when the common figure hit flag is set to OFF (step S1512: No), that is, when the lottery result in the common figure lottery is out, the MPU 41 ends the common figure game control process.

[Data setting process]
In the data setting process, a setting process related to the success / failure information in the holding storage area 412b is executed when starting a game per game. Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1601 and S1602>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1601, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the storage number storage area NA, and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area RE1 to the execution area AE (step S1602). ).

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area RE2 to the fourth reservation area RE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the validity information of the second reservation area RE2 to the first reservation area RE1, moves the validity information of the third reservation area RE3 to the second reservation area RE2, and determines whether the fourth reservation area RE4 is correct. The information is moved to the third reserved area RE3.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets a shift command indicating that the success / failure information of the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 has been shifted in the RAM 412, and ends the data setting process. The shift command set in step S1604 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed.

[Variation start processing]
In the change start process, a process is executed to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 to execute the change display based on the validity information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b. Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1507 of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines the lottery result in the lottery per common drawing based on the success / failure information moved to the execution area AE and the common drawing hit / fail table (see FIG. 15A). It is determined whether or not the result is correct, and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is correct (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 per unit included as the validity information is 0 corresponding to the hit. If the result of the determination is correct (step S1702: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1703. If the result of the determination is not successful but not correct (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1706. Migrate to

<Steps S1703 to S1705>
When the result of the determination is successful (step S1702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal winning flag on (step S1703). The common symbol winning flag indicates whether or not to start a game per common symbol when the normal symbol that is being displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 is stopped and displayed in step S1510 of the general symbol game control process of FIG. This is a flag for determination, and is referred to in step S1512 in the usual game control process. Then, the MPU 41 determines the type per universal figure based on the value of the type counter per universal figure included in the success / failure information (step S1704), and the power of the electric winning device 37 according to the type (opening / closing pattern) per universal figure. An open / close counter indicating the remaining open / close count of the bonus winning door 371 is set in the RAM 412 (step S1705). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening / closing number counter to 1 when A is per common figure, sets the value of the opening / closing number counter to 2 when it is B per common figure, and is C per common figure. In this case, the value of the opening / closing number counter is set to 3, the value of the opening / closing number counter is set to 4 when D is per common figure, and the value of the opening / closing number counter is set to 5 when E is per common figure. When the hit is F, the value of the open / close number counter is set to 6, and when the hit is G, the value of the open / close number counter is set to 7.

<Step S1706>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 displays a variation pattern and a variation display time counter that define the variation display time of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display unit 361 and the decoration symbol on the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the variation pattern of the ordinary game. Set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets a fluctuation display time determined based on the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation pattern table per common figure (see FIG. 17A) as a fluctuation pattern, and corresponds to the fluctuation display time. Set the variable display time counter.

<Step S1707>
In step S1707, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the type per common map identified in step S1703 and the variation pattern identified in step S1706. Thereby, in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  Note that, as described above, when the lottery result is a win, the MPU 41 adds “A01” in which any one of “A” to “G” indicating the type of the common figure is added to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any one of “A03”, “B01” to “B03”... “G01” to “G03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command.

<Step S1708>
If the result of the determination is not successful but not correct (step S1702: No), the MPU 41 displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal game. A fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation display time counter for defining the fluctuation display time are set (step S1708). Specifically, the MPU 41 is determined on the basis of the usual fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the extraordinary reach random number counter (unusual figure), and the extraordinary fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 17B). The fluctuation display time to be set is set as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation display time counter corresponding to the fluctuation display time is set.

<Step S1709>
In step S1709, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command that includes the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary drawing for the ordinary game is out of date and the variation pattern specified in step S1708. Thereby, in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is unsuccessful, the MPU 41 selects any one of “H01” to “H05” with “H” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “05” are unsuccessful. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is out of order, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear out, or complete out of the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 causes the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to start normal symbol variation display. Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal game running flag to ON (step S1711), and ends the change start process. The ordinary game display flag is referred to in step S1501 in the ordinary game control process of FIG. 26 to determine whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed on the main display unit.

[Game control processing per common figure]
In the game-per-game control process, a process for advancing the game per game is executed when the lottery result of the lottery is a win. In the game per game, when the electric winning device 37 is activated and the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning port 376, the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is a small win. The right to execute the small hit game after the end of the normal hit game is granted. Here, FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the game control process per common figure executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. In the following, the game control processing per universal game will be described with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game start flag per game that is set to ON in step S1513 of FIG. 26 is set to ON. The game start flag per flag is a flag for starting a game per game that allows the game ball 99 to enter the electric role winning port 376 when the electric role winning door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened. It is. In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376, a small hit game is executed that gives an opportunity to start a big hit game in which a large amount of game balls 99 are expected to be acquired. Then, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802 when the game start flag per common figure is set on (step S1801: Yes), and when the game start flag per general figure is set off (step S1802). S1801: No), the process proceeds to step S1809 in FIG.

<Steps S1802 to S1804>
When the game start flag per flag is set on (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the game execution flag per map as ON (step S1802) and sets a game start command per map. (Step S1803), the usual figure per game start flag set to ON in step S1513 of the general figure game control process of FIG. 26 is set to OFF (step S1804). The game-per-game playing flag is a flag indicating that a game per game is being executed. In step S1502 in the general-game control process of FIG. 26 and in step S1809 of the game-per-game control process. Referenced. The game per game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a game per game is started, and an external output in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the process. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the like to execute a game effect per game for a game per game.

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 opens the electric combination winning / closing game by opening the electric combination winning door 371 of the electric combination winning device 37, and further sets the electric combination winning door open flag to ON (step S1806). The electric power winning door open flag is a flag indicating that the electric winning door 371 is open, and it is necessary to determine whether there is a timing for closing the electric winning door 371. Reference is made to step S1810 of the game control process.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 sets a power combination winning door opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the power winning winning door 371. Then, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open / close counter indicating the remaining open / close count of the electric winning door 371 set in step S1705 in the variation start process of FIG. 28 (step S1808), finish.

<Step S1809>
As shown in FIG. 30, when the start flag per game is set to OFF (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to ON and is set to ON in step S1802 in the game control process per game. It is determined whether or not a game-per-game playing flag indicating that a winning game is being executed is set to ON (step S1809). The MPU 41 proceeds with the process to step S1810 when the game execution flag per common figure is set on (step S1809: Yes), and when the game execution flag per general figure is set off (step S1809). S1809: No), the game control processing per the usual figure is ended.

<Step S1810>
In step S1810, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric winning prize door open flag that is set to ON in step S1806 in the normal game control process is set to ON. When the electric winning prize door open flag is set on (step S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1811, and when the electric winning prize door open flag is set off (step S1810: No). ), And the process proceeds to step S1823.

<Step S1811>
When the flag for opening the winning combination winning door is set to ON (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the value of the winning combination door opening time counter set in step S1807 in the game control process per the usual figure is set. It is determined whether or not it is 0, that is, whether or not it is time to close the electric winning award door 371 of the electric winning device 37 (step S1811). When the value of the electric winning prize door opening time counter is 0 (step S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1812, and when the value of the electric winning prize door opening time counter is not 0 (step S1811: No), The game control process is terminated per usual figure.

<Steps S1812 and S1813>
If the value of the electric winning award door opening time counter is 0 (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing for closing the electric winning award door 371 of the electric winning award device 37. By closing, the electric role opening / closing game is ended (step S1812), and the electric role winning door open flag is set to OFF (step S1813). That is, the execution time of the electric role opening / closing game is fixed to a certain time defined by the electric role winning door opening time counter. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to equalization of time required for a series of game cycles in which the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order.

<Step S1814>
In step S1814, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric winning prize flag is set to ON. The electric role winning flag is a flag indicating that a winning has occurred at the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37. For example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. It is set to ON when setting a prize ball command for winning in the mouth 376. When the electric winning prize flag is set on (step S1814: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1815, and when the electric winning prize flag is set off (step S1814: No), processing is performed. Goes to step S1819.

<Steps S1815 and S1816>
When the electric winning prize flag is set to ON (step S1814: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the value of the random number counter C4 per special figure and the value of the big hit type counter C5 (step S1815), and determines whether or not the special figure is appropriate. Based on (see FIG. 17C), it is determined whether or not the lottery result in the lottery per special drawing is a small hit (step S1816). Here, the MPU 41 acquires the value of the jackpot type counter C5 in addition to the value of the random number counter C4 per special figure in step S1815. That is, the jackpot type is determined when the electric winning prize flag is set to ON (step S1814: Yes), that is, when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376. However, the value of the big hit type counter C5 may be acquired when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. That is, the jackpot type may be determined when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384.

  Then, when the lottery result in the lottery per special drawing is a small hit (step S1816: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1817, and when the lottery result in the lottery per special drawing is not a small hit (out) If there is any) (step S1816: No), the game control process is terminated per game without executing the small hit game by opening / closing the current electric winning box door 371 (electric open / close game).

<Steps S1817 and S1818>
When the lottery result in the lottery per special figure is a small win (step S1816: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the small hit game start flag to ON (step S1817) and sets the electric winning prize flag to OFF (step S1817). S1818). That is, in the case of the electric role opening and closing game in the game per game, when the game ball 99 enters the electric role winning opening 376 and the lottery result in the lottery per special drawing is a small win, The small hit game starts immediately after the end of. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game based on the start of the electric role opening / closing game (game cycle) can be advanced as much as possible, so that the time required for the entire game cycle can be shortened. Therefore, the end timing of the jackpot game executed at the end of the game cycle can be brought close to the start timing of the game cycle. As a result, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between the open / closed games.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit game is played when it is confirmed that the game ball 99 is inserted into the power role winning opening 376 when the power role winning door 371 is closed (when the power role opening / closing game is finished). Although it is executed, when it is confirmed that the game ball 99 has been inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376 in the electric open / close game, the electric open / close game may be terminated and the small hit game may be started. . Moreover, it may be added that the big hit game is not executed as an execution condition of the small hit game triggered by the game ball 99 entering the electric winning prize opening 376. That is, it is possible to invalidate the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric winning prize opening 376 during the execution of the jackpot game and restrict the execution of the jackpot game.

<Step S1819>
In step S1819, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter indicating the remaining open / close count of the electric winning door 371 set in step S1705 in the variation start process of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. When the value of the opening / closing number counter is 0 (step S1819: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1822, and when the value of the opening / closing number counter is not 0 (step S1819: No), the process proceeds to step S1820. To do.

<Steps S1820 and S1821>
When the value of the opening / closing number counter is not 0 (step S1819: No), the MPU 41 displays an interval time counter between opening times indicating the time from closing the electric winning box door 371 to opening the electric winning box door 371 next. In addition to being set (step S1820), the flag during the opening interval indicating that it is an interval (closing period) until the electronic winning door 371 is opened is set to ON (step S1821), and the game control processing per the usual figure Exit.

<Step S1822>
When the value of the opening / closing counter is 0 (step S1819: Yes), the MPU 41 does not need to execute the electric opening / closing game by opening / closing the electric winning gate 371 as a game per normal game, so A game-per-game flag indicating that the game is in progress is set to OFF (step S1822), and the game control process per game is terminated.

<Step S1823>
In the case where the flag for opening the electoral winning door is set to OFF (step S1810: No), the MPU 41 sets the flag for the interval between opening that is set to ON in step S1821 of the game control process per bonus. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S1823). When the during-open interval flag is set on (step S1823: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1824, and when the during-open interval flag is set off (step S1823: No). Then, the game control process per the usual figure is finished.

<Step S1824>
When the during-open interval flag is set to ON (step S1823: YES), the MPU 41 indicates the time until the electric winning door 371 is opened, and is set in step S1820 of the game control process per normal figure. It is determined whether or not the value of the interval time counter between releases is 0. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the electric role opening / closing game by opening the electric role winning door 371. When the value of the interval time counter between opening is 0 (step S1824: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1805 in FIG. 29 and starts the electric role opening / closing game by opening the electric role winning door 371. Processing is executed (steps S1805 to S1808). On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter between releases is not 0 (step S1824: No), the MPU 41 ends the game control process per ordinary figure.

[Small hit game control processing]
In the small hit game control process, when the lottery result in the lottery per special drawing executed when the winning is generated in the electric winning prize opening 376 of the electric winning prize device 37 in the game per ordinary figure is a small win. A process for advancing the executed small hit game is executed. In the small win game, the V winning device 38 is operated, and the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning port 384, whereby the right to execute the big hit game after the end of the small hit game is granted. Here, FIG.31 and FIG.32 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the small hit game control process performed by step S1405 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the small hit game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 31, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small hit game start flag set to ON in step S1817 of the normal game control process of FIG. 30 is set to ON. The small hit game start flag is a flag indicating that a small hit game that allows the game ball 99 to enter the V winning port 384 is started by opening and closing the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38. . When a game ball 99 enters the V prize opening 384, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be expected. Then, when the small hit game start flag is set on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902, and when the small hit game start flag is set off (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1911 in FIG.

<Steps S1902 to S1904>
When the small hit game start flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a small hit game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the small hit game is started (step S1901: Yes). S1902), a small hit game execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set to ON (step S1903), and the small hit game start flag is set to OFF (step S1904). The small hit game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S1905 to S1908>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 determines the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C5 and the jackpot type distribution table (see FIG. 17D) acquired in step S1815 of the bonus game control process of FIG. To do. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot type is 8R jackpot (step S1906). If the jackpot type is 8R jackpot (step S1906: Yes), the MPR41 sets the 8R jackpot flag to ON (step S1907). If not (step S1906: NO), the 16R jackpot flag is set to ON in order to determine that the jackpot type is 16R jackpot (step S1908).

<Steps S1909 and S1910>
In step S1909, the MPU 41 opens the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 to start a small hit game (step S1909), and further sets a V winning door opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the V winning door 381. (Step S1910), the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S1911>
As shown in FIG. 32, in step S1911, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small hit game execution flag set to ON in step S1903 of the small hit game control process is set to ON, that is, whether the small hit game is Determine whether it is running. Then, when the small hitting game execution flag is set on (step S1911: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1912, and when the V winning door opening flag is set off (step S1911: No), the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S1912>
In step S1912, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big hit game standby flag set to ON in step S1916 described later of the small hit game control process is set to ON. The jackpot game standby flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in a standby state in a situation where the jackpot game is determined to be executed. When the jackpot gaming standby flag is set on (step S1912: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1919, and when the jackpot gaming standby flag is set off (step S1912: No), processing is performed. Goes to step S1913.

<Step S1913>
In step S1913, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set to ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a winning has occurred at the V winning opening 384. For example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. When set to ON. When the V winning flag is set on (step S1913: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1914. When the V winning flag is set off (step S1912: No), the MPU 41 performs the process. The process proceeds to S1919.

<Steps S1914 to S1918>
When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S1913: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the game ball 99 from the standby position that allows the game ball 99 to enter the V winning port 384 to the V winning port 384. The switching unit 386 of the V winning device 38 is moved to the operation position that restricts the winning (step S1914). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 at the stage where the game ball 99 has been entered into the V winning opening 384. Then, by restricting the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384, the game ball 99 that has entered the V winning portion 382 comes into the normal winning opening 385. Further, the MPU 41 waits for the jackpot game to be executed on condition that the jackpot game execution flag set to ON in step S2007 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 is not set to ON (step S1915: No). A jackpot game standby flag indicating that the game is in a state is set to ON (step S1916), and a V winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that a winning has occurred at the V winning opening 384 is set (step S1917). Further, the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S1918). The V winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot game is executed when it is confirmed that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384 during the small hit game (when the V winning door 381 is opened). If the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 on the condition that there is not, a right to execute the jackpot is generated. In other words, if a jackpot game is executed when it is confirmed that a game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384, the generation of the right to execute the jackpot game is limited. When a jackpot game is being executed at the start of the jackpot game, the switching unit 386 is placed in a standby position to limit the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 384 and generate a right to the jackpot game It may not be allowed to. In other words, the right to execute the jackpot game may be generated on the condition that the jackpot game has been completed by the start of the jackpot game (when the V winning opening 384 is opened). In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the big hit game is being executed at the end of the small hit game, and not to generate the right to execute the big hit game when the big hit game is not executed. In other words, the right to execute the jackpot game may be generated on condition that the jackpot game is ended by the end of the jackpot game (when the V winning opening 384 is closed).

  On the other hand, when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON (step S1915: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1918. That is, in the gaming machine 10, even when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, when the big hit game is being executed, the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384. The right to execute the jackpot game based on the entered ball is not generated, and even if the game ball enters the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 384, the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, when the big hit game does not end within the opening interval of the electric prize winning door 371 of the electric prize winning device 37, the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game. May be invalidated. Then, when the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game is invalidated, the big hit game that could be executed in the interval between releases is not executed, and the player receives one big hit It becomes impossible to acquire the game ball 99 that can be acquired in the game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the game ball 99 that is right-handed is guided to the variable winning opening 353 (electric prize winning device 37) by the prescribed path 35 through the same route, so that the gaming ball 99 is variable winning opening. The time to reach the unit 353 is made uniform, and the interval time between the opening of the electric winning box 371 of the electric winning device 37 is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game. As a result, as long as the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31 from the start of the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be ended within the open interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game from being invalidated, and to prevent a disadvantage that the big hit game is not executed in the interval between the releases.

<Step S1919>
In step S1919, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the V winning door opening time counter set in step S1910 of the small hit game control process is zero. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to close the V winning door 381. When the value of the V winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S1919: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1920, and when the value of the V winning door opening time counter is not 0 (step S1919: No). The small hit game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1920 to S1922>
When the value of the V winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S1919: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the V winning door 381 and finishes the small hit game (step S1920), and the game ball to the V winning opening 384 The switching unit 386 of the V winning device 38 is moved from the operating position for restricting 99 winning balls to a standby position for allowing the gaming ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 (step S1921), and the small hit game is being executed. The flag is set to off (step S1922). That is, the execution time of the small hit game is fixed to a certain time defined by the V winning door opening time counter. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to equalization of time required for a series of game cycles in which the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order.

<Steps S1923 to S1925>
In step S1923, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game standby flag set to on in step S1916 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is waiting to execute a jackpot game that is executed when a winning is generated at the V winning opening 384. When the jackpot game standby flag is set to ON (step S1923: YES), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag for starting the jackpot game to ON (step S1924), and the bonus game control is performed. The process ends. That is, when a game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game, the big hit game is started immediately after the small hit game ends. As a result, the start timing of the jackpot game based on the start of the electric role opening / closing game (game cycle) can be advanced as much as possible, so that the time required for the entire game cycle can be shortened. Therefore, the end timing of the jackpot game executed at the end of the game cycle can be brought close to the start timing of the game cycle. As a result, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the interval between the open / closed games.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game standby flag is set to OFF at the time of ending the jackpot game (step S1923: No), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to ON because it is not necessary to execute the jackpot game. Without doing this, the jackpot type flag (8R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag) that is set to ON in step S1907 or S1908 is set to OFF (step S1925), and the bonus game control process is terminated.

[Big hit game control processing]
In the jackpot game control process, a process of advancing the jackpot game that is executed when a winning is generated at the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the variable winning device 39 is operated, and a round game in which the game ball 99 is opened to be able to enter the variable winning port 394 is executed a plurality of times, so that a large amount of game balls 99 can be obtained. . Here, FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the small hit game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 33, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big hit game start flag set to ON in step S1924 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 32 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start the jackpot game. When the jackpot game start flag is set on (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2002, and when the jackpot game start flag is set off (step S2001: No) The process proceeds to step S2011.

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 8R jackpot flag that is set to ON in step S1907 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 is set to ON. Is determined (step S2002). Then, when the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2002: Yes), that is, when the jackpot type is 8R jackpot, the MPU 41 executes eight round games in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode. Then, the value of the round number counter is set to 8 (step S2003). On the other hand, if the 8R jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2002: No), since it can be determined that the jackpot type is 16R jackpot, in order to execute 16 round games in the jackpot game open / close execution mode, The value of the round number counter is set to 16 (step S2004).

<Steps S2005 to S2010>
In step S2005, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag referenced in step S2001 to OFF, and further sets the jackpot type flag (8R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2006). Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to ON (step S2007), and notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started. Is set (step S2008). The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. In addition, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the jackpot game is opening (step S2009), sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S2010), and ends the jackpot game. To do.

<Step S2011>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game execution flag that is set to on in step S2007 of the jackpot game control process is set to on. Is determined (step S2011). If the jackpot game running flag is set on (step S2011: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2012, and if the jackpot game running flag is set off (step S2011: No), the jackpot game The game control process ends.

<Step S2012>
When the jackpot game execution flag is set to on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set to on in step S2009 of the jackpot game control process is set to on. That is, it is determined whether or not the opening of the jackpot game is being executed (step S2012). If the opening flag is set on (step S2012: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2013. If the opening flag is set off (step S2012: No), the process proceeds to step S2020 in FIG. Migrate to

<Step S2013>
When the in-opening flag is set to ON (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the opening time counter set in step S2010 of the jackpot game control process is 0, that is, ends the opening. Then, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is to be started (step S2013). When the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the opening time counter is not 0 (step S2013: No), the MPU 41 performs the jackpot game control process. finish.

<Steps S2014 to S2919>
When the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to OFF (step S2014), opens the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39, and starts the round game. (Step S2015). As a result, the game balls 99 are allowed to enter the variable winning opening 394, and an opportunity to acquire a large amount of game balls 99 is given. Then, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning door open flag indicating that the variable winning door 391 is open to the variable winning device 39 (step S2016), and the variable winning indicating the remaining open time of the variable winning door 391. A door opening time counter is set (step S2017). Here, the variable winning door 391 is closed by the elapse of the maximum opening time defined by the variable winning door opening time counter, and the upper limit number (for example, ten) of game balls 99 entering the variable winning opening 394. . The value of the variable winning door opening time counter set in step S2017 is, for example, a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls 99 by the upper limit number (for example, 10). Set to: Therefore, before the upper limit number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable prize opening 394, the variable prize opening 394 can be closed as the maximum opening time elapses. Thereby, it is possible to equalize the time required for the round game in the jackpot game by matching the maximum opening time, and to uniformize or fix the time required for the jackpot game. For this reason, it is possible to equalize or fix the time required for the game cycle in which the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order. This makes it easy to end the jackpot game within the interval between the opening / closing games of the electric power open / close game of the game per multi-game when multiple electric power open / close games are executed in one game per normal game. . As a result, when a plurality of electric opening / closing games are executed in one game per game, it is possible to execute the jackpot game for the number of times corresponding to the number of executions of the electric opening / closing game.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game in the opening / closing execution mode is started (step S2018), and in step S2003 or step S2004 of the jackpot game control process. One is subtracted from the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be set (step S2019), and the jackpot game control is terminated. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S2020>
As shown in FIG. 34, in step S2020, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning door opening flag that is set to ON in step S2016 of FIG. 33 in the jackpot game control process is set to ON. It is determined whether or not the variable winning door 391 is opened during the execution of the game. When the variable winning door open flag is set on (step S2020: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2021, and when the variable winning door open flag is set off (step S2020: No), the process proceeds to step S2037 in FIG.

<Step S2021>
When the variable winning door open flag is set to ON (step S2020: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred at the variable winning slot 394 is set to ON. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred at the variable winning opening 394 (step S2021). For example, in the winning ball command setting process in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, the variable winning flag is set to ON when setting a winning ball command for winning in the variable winning slot 394. When the variable winning flag is set on (step S2021: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2022, and when the variable winning flag is set off (step S2021: No), the process proceeds to step S2022. The process proceeds to S2026.

<Steps S2022 and S2023>
When the variable winning flag is set to ON (step S2021: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning counter indicating the number of winnings to the variable winning slot 394 (step S2022), and turns off the variable winning flag. (Step S2023).

<Steps S2024 and S2025>
In step S2024, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning counter added in step S2021 is 10. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to close the variable winning door 391 by entering the upper limit number of game balls 99. When the value of the variable prize counter is 10 (step S2024: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the variable prize door opening time counter from 0 (step S2025), and the process proceeds to step S2027. On the other hand, if the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2024: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2026.

<Step S2026>
When the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2024: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S2026). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to close the variable winning door 391 when the maximum opening time is reached. If the value of the variable prize door opening time counter is 0 (step S2026: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2027. If the value of the variable prize door opening time counter is not 0 (step S2026: No), the jackpot game The control process ends.

<Steps S2027 and S2028>
When the value of the variable prize counter is 10 (step S2024: Yes) or when the value of the variable prize door opening time counter is 0 (step S2026: Yes), the MPU 41 is the timing for closing the variable prize door 391. Therefore, the variable winning door 391 is closed to end the round game (step S2027), and the variable winning door open flag is set to OFF (step S2028). In other words, the round game is satisfied when either the elapse of a predetermined period (maximum opening time) defined by the variable winning door opening time counter and the entering of the upper limit number of gaming balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394 are satisfied. The process ends when the variable winning door 391 is closed. Then, as described above, the predetermined time (maximum opening time) defined by the variable prize door opening time counter is multiplied by the upper limit number (for example, 10) to the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99. By setting it to a time (for example, 6 seconds) or less, the variable prize opening 394 can be closed as the maximum opening time elapses before the upper limit number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable prize opening 394. Therefore, the time required for the round game in the jackpot game is made equal to the maximum opening time or a time close thereto, and further, the time required for the jackpot game can be made uniform or fixed.

<Step S2029>
In step S2029, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the round number counter set in step S2003 or S2004 is zero. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode by determining whether there is a remaining round game to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. If the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S2029: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2033. If the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S2029: No), the process proceeds to step S2030. To do.

<Steps S2030 to S2032>
If the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S2029: No), it can be determined that there is still a round game to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, so the MPU 41 determines the interval between the opening / closing operations of the variable winning door 391 (variable winning a prize). Variable winning interval flag indicating that the variable winning door 391 is waiting to be opened is set to ON (step S2030), and the variable winning interval indicating the time until the variable winning door 391 is opened. A time counter is set (step S2031). Then, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning interval start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the variable winning interval is started (step S2032), and ends the jackpot game control process. The variable winning interval start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S2033 to S2036>
If the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S2029: Yes), it can be determined that there is no remaining round game to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode (the timing for ending the opening / closing execution mode). An ending start flag indicating that ending is started in the game is set to ON (step S2033), and an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time is set (step S2034). Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that ending is to be started (step S2035), and the jackpot flag (8R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag set to ON in step S1906 or S1907) ) Is set to OFF (step S2036), and the jackpot game control process is terminated. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S2037>
As shown in FIG. 35, when the variable winning door opening flag is set to OFF (step S2020: No), the MPU 41 has the variable winning interval flag set to ON in step S2030 set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2037). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning door 391 is closed and is in an open standby state. If the variable winning interval flag is set to ON (step S2037: YES), the process proceeds to step S2038. If the variable winning interval flag is set to OFF (step S2037: NO), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2039.

<Step S2038>
In step S2038, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning interval time counter set in step S2031 is 0, that is, whether or not it is time to open the variable winning door 391. When the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S2038: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the opening timing of the variable winning door 391. Therefore, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2015 in FIG. The release process is executed (steps S2015 to S2019). On the other hand, when the variable winning interval time counter is not 0 (step S2038: No), the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2039>
When the variable winning interval flag is set to off (step S2037: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to on in step S2033 is set to on, that is, the ending in the jackpot game. It is determined whether it is time to start (step S2039). When the ending start flag is set on (step S2039: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2040. When the ending start flag is set off (step S2039: No), the MPU 41 performs the process. The process proceeds to S2043.

<Steps S2040 to S2042>
When the ending start flag is set on (step S2039: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that ending is in progress (step S2040), and the ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time. Is set (step S2041). Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending start flag to OFF (step S2042), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2043>
When the ending start flag is set to off (step S2039: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the ending flag set to on in step S2040 is set to on, that is, the ending is executed in the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not (step S2043). When the ending flag is set on (step S2043: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2044, and when the ending flag is set off (step S2043: No), the jackpot game The control process ends.

<Step S2044>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S2043: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter set in step S2041 is 0, that is, at the end timing of the ending (big hit game). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2044). If the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S2044: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2045. If the value of the ending time counter is not 0 (step S2044: No), the MPU 41 performs the jackpot game control process. finish.

<Steps S2045 to S2047>
When the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S2044: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the end timing of the ending (big hit game), so the ending flag set to ON in step S2040 is set OFF. (Step S2045), the jackpot game execution flag set to ON in Step S2011 is set to OFF (Step S2046). Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is over (step S2047), and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

  As described above, in the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game consisting of an opening, a plurality of round games and an ending is executed, and the opening and ending times are fixed to a fixed time defined by the time counter. In addition, each round game has a predetermined time (maximum opening time) defined by the variable winning door opening time counter as described above, and an upper limit number (for example, 10) for the launch interval of gaming balls 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds). ) Multiplied by (for example, 6 seconds) or less, the time required for the round game is equalized to the maximum opening time or a time close thereto. Therefore, since the time required for jackpot games is made uniform for each jackpot type, if multiple times of opening and closing games are executed in one game per game, between games of opening and closing games of games per game It becomes easy to end the jackpot game within the interval between releases. As a result, when a plurality of electric opening / closing games are executed in one game per game, it is possible to execute the jackpot game for the number of times corresponding to the number of executions of the electric opening / closing game.

[Performance information update processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1408 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 36, the MPU 41 reads out the number of various payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2101), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Reading is performed (step S2102). Here, the number of payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information and the like, and is the number of payout balls for the general winning award, the number of payout balls for the electronic winning award, the number of payout balls for the V winning award, and the number of normal payout points. And the number of balls that can be paid out in the variable prize slot. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read number of the general winning award payout and the number of out balls, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2103) (see FIG. 37). Note that the current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × number of general winning award payout balls / out balls.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out in step S2102 has reached 60000 balls. If the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2105. When the number of out balls has not reached 60000 balls (step S2104: No), the process proceeds to step S2109.

<Steps S2105 to S2109>
When the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S2104: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S2105 and S2106). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base last time in the base information (step S2105), and step S2103. The current base BL updated in step S1 is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S2106), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S2107). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of out balls (step S2108), updates other specific performance information other than the base information (step S2109), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
38 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1409 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2206 described later or step S2230 in FIG. If the BL display flag is set on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2208 of FIG. 39, and if the BL display flag is set off (step S2201: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2202). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 has been displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2212 of FIG. When the B1 display flag is set on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2217 in FIG. 40, and when the B1 display flag is set off (step S2202: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2203.

<Step S2203>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S2203). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 has been displayed two times before the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2221 of FIG. 40 described later. When the B2 display flag is set on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2226 in FIG. 41, and when the B2 display flag is set off (step S2203: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2204.

<Step S2204>
When the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2203: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S2204). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2205, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from OFF to ON (step S2204: NO), The display control process ends.

<Steps S2205 to S2207>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S2204: YES), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S2205). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37A, “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S2206), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S2207), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2201: Yes), as shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S2207 of FIG. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2209). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2209: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2210, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2209: No) ), The process proceeds to step S2214.

<Steps S2210 to S2213>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2209: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag off (step S2210), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2211). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37A, “8.”, “1” indicating that the previous 60,000 base B1 is 33%. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 3 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2” and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S2212), sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S2213), and The display control process ends.

<Step S2214>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2209: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2214). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2214: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2215, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2214: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2214: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the current base BL by turning off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S2215 and S2216>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2214: YES), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S2215), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S2215). S2216), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2202: YES), as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S2213 of FIG. S2217), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2218). If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2218: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2219, and if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2218: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S2223.

<Steps S2219 to S2222>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2218: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S2219), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2220). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), “8.”, “2” indicating that the 60,000 base B2 is 32% the previous time. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 2 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is an example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S2221), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the previous time (step S2222). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S2223>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2218: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2223). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2223: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2224, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2223: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2223: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434 so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is turned off. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S2224 and S2225>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2223: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S2224), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S2223). In step S2225), the display control process ends.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2203: Yes), as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S2222 of FIG. S2226), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2227). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2228, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2227: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S2232.

<Steps S2228 to S2231>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag off (step S2228), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current state base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2229). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37A, “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S2230), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2231), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Step S2232>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2227: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2232). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2232: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2233, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2232: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2232: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434 before the 60,000 ball base B2 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S2233 and S2234>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2232: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S2233), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S2233). S2234), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. The sound lamp control device 5 controls the operations of the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with a command transmitted from the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and performs a process for executing a general game effect or the like. Done.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Explanation of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S2301), command determination processing (step S2302), universal game effect processing (step S2303), and universal game effect processing ( Step S2304), a jackpot game effect process (step S2305) and a jackpot game effect process (step S2306) are executed.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2301), the MPU 51 executes a process of updating various counters such as an effect pattern type counter and a variation display counter. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the game start command received from the main control device 4, for example, the effect type counter is a loop that loops between 0-109. It is a counter. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the initial value of the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2302), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2302 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 43, in step S2401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2401: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2401, and is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is subject to processing. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Steps S2402 and S2403>
In step S2402, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the time of the normal game, that is, the variation time of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341, and is set in step S1707 or S1709 in the variation start process of FIG. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2402: Yes), the information included in the variation pattern, for example, the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result in the lottery per regular drawing are stored in the RAM (step S2402). S2403), the command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2402: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2404.

<Steps S2404 and S2405>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a usual game start command. The general game start command is a command indicating the start of a general game, and is set in step S1508 in the general game control process of FIG. 26 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a general game start command (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a general game effect start flag for starting the general game effect to ON (step S2405). The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the received command is not a general game start command (step S2404: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2406.

<Steps S2406 and S2407>
In step S2406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game start command per normal game. The game per game start command is a command indicating that a game per game is started, and is set in step S1803 in the game control process per game shown in FIG. 29 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. . Here, when the received command is a game start command per game (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a game effect start flag for starting a game effect per game to ON (step S2407). Then, the command determination process ends. On the other hand, when the received command is not a game start command per normal game (step S2406: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2408.

<Steps S2408 and S2409>
In step S2408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a small hit game start command. The small hit game start command is a command indicating that a small hit game is started, and is set in step S1902 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 31 by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a small hit game start command (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the small hit game effect start flag for starting the small hit game effect to ON (step S2409). The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the received command is not a small hit game start command (step S2408: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2410.

<Steps S2410 and S2411>
In step S2410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a V winning command. The V winning command is a command indicating that a winning has occurred at the V winning opening 384, and is set in step S1917 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 32 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a V winning command (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has occurred (step S2411), and ends the command determination process. To do. On the other hand, if the received command is not a V winning command (step S2410: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2412.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
In step S2412, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set in step S2008 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2412: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a jackpot game effect start flag for starting the jackpot game effect to ON (step S2413), and performs the command determination process. finish. On the other hand, if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2412: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2414.

<Steps S2414 and S2415>
In step S2414, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command indicates that in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game, the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is opened to start a round game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning opening 394. It is a command and is set in step S2018 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2414: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag for starting the round game effect to ON (step S2415), and performs the command determination process. finish. On the other hand, when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2414: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2416.

<Steps S2416 and S2417>
In step S2416, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variable winning interval start command. The variable winning interval start command is a command indicating that an interval between round games (variable winning interval) is started. As described above, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs the step S2032 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. Is set. Here, when the received command is a variable winning interval start command (step S2416: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a variable winning interval effect start flag for starting a variable winning interval effect to ON (step S2417). The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the received command is not a variable winning interval start command (step S2416: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2418.

<Steps S2418 and S2419>
In step S2418, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game is started, and is set in step S2035 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 34 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. When the received command is an ending start command (step S2418: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an ending effect start flag for starting the ending effect to ON (step S2419), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2418: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2420.

<Steps S2420 and S2421>
In step S2420, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in step S2047 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 35 by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a jackpot game effect end flag for ending the jackpot game effect to ON (step S2421), and performs the command determination process. finish. On the other hand, when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2420: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2422.

<Step S2422>
In step S2422, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing a process based on other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Normal game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 42, in the general game effect production process (step S2003) of the sub timer interruption process, in the game per universal figure for notifying the lottery result in the general graphic lottery, the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the electrical decoration A process for causing the unit 27 or the like to execute a game effect per usual figure is performed. The general game effect is determined and started when the general game effect start flag set to ON in step S2405 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set ON. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the universal game effect process executed in step S2303 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the general game effect processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 44, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the general game effect start flag set to ON in step S2405 in the command determination process of FIG. It is determined whether it is time to start production. When the ordinary game effect start flag is set on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2502, and when the ordinary game effect start flag is set off (step S2501: No), the ordinary game effect processing is terminated.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When the usual game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 reads the contents of the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 512 in step S2403 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 (step S2502). ). Then, the MPU 51 changes the variation pattern command, the variation type table (see FIG. 45) and the effect type table (see FIGS. 46A to 46C) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the effect type counter. Based on the above, a combination of decorative symbols and an effect type (effect pattern) to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined (step S2503).

  The combination of the decorative symbols is determined according to the type per common figure when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win. For example, the combination of the decorative symbols is “111” when the electric character winning door 371 of the electric character winning device 37 is “A” per time that the electric character winning door 371 is opened and closed once (the electric character opening and closing game is executed once). When the winning door 371 is opened / closed twice (electrical opening / closing game is executed twice) per B, “222”, the electric winning door 371 is opened / closed three times (electrical opening / closing game is executed three times) ) “333” in the case of C per ordinary figure, “444” in the case of D per ordinary figure in which the electric prize winning door 371 is opened and closed four times (the electric opening and closing game is executed four times), When the electric role winning door 371 is opened / closed 5 times (Electrical opening / closing game is executed 5 times) and E is per common figure, “555”, the electric role winning door 371 is opened / closed 6 times (electrical opening / closing game is 6 "666", and the electric winning prize door 371 is opened and closed seven times (electric utility opening and closing game) If a seven performed) by the Prussian view per G is "777". In other words, when the lottery result in the regular drawing is a win, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is the combination of the number of the doublet and the electric character winning device 37 in the game per common symbol. This matches the number of times that the winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times that the electric role opening and closing game is executed). Therefore, the player does not need to check the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36, but by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the player can change the type of game per game. It is possible to know the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 of the bonus winning device 37 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game). Thereby, the player can enjoy what number the decoration pattern reaches the reach state when the display of the decoration pattern on the symbol display unit 341 is variably displayed. In this case, it is possible to more enjoy whether the reach decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with a doublet that clearly indicates that it is a normal figure.

  In this way, the player can use the symbol display unit 341 by setting the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed as numbers that correspond to the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 (the number of times the electric role opening / closing game has been executed). Since the lottery result in the lottery per common figure can be grasped by paying attention to the symbol display portion 341, the game can be enjoyed. In addition, the symbol display unit 341 is arranged more easily than the normal symbol display unit 361 in which a lottery result in a lottery per regular drawing is clearly shown. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 than the player who pays attention to the normal symbols that are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361. It is possible to easily grasp the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371. In addition, since the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning box door 371 in the game per game can be easily grasped, when the jackpot game is executed, the number of opening / closing times of the remaining electric winning door 371 (the number of execution times of electric opening / closing game) ) Can be grasped easily, it can be easily predicted whether or not the opening / closing of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game is executed after the end of the current jackpot game. Then, when the opening / closing of the electric winning box door 371 (execution of electric opening / closing game) is scheduled to be executed after the end of the jackpot game, it is necessary to make the game ball 99 enter the electric winning prize opening 376. You can grasp that there is. This prevents the game ball 99 from being delayed or left-handed when the timing for opening the electric role winning door 371 is reached, so that the game ball 99 is placed in the electric role winning opening 376. By not entering the ball, it is possible to more easily prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage that the small hit game and thus the big hit game are not executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per common drawing is a win, the combination of decorative symbols (numbers in the blue eyes) that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the electric prize winning in the game per common symbol The number of opening / closing of the electric winning prize door 371 of the device 37 (the number of times of executing the electric opening / closing game) coincides, but the number of the doublet and the number of opening / closing of the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric opening / closing game) And do not have to match. In this case, even if the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is a small number of double eyes, it is possible to set a large number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric opening / closing game). it can. For example, it may be possible to make the number of the doublet, which is a combination of decorative symbols in the case where the lottery result in the lottery per lottery wins, matches the minimum number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371. In other words, “111” is one of A to G per time that the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 (number of times of execution of the electric role opening / closing game) is one or more, and “222” is the number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371. One of the BGs (the number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) is BG or more, and “333” is the number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) is 3 times or more. One of C to G per common figure, “444” is one of D to G per common figure where the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning prize door 371 (the number of executions of electric role opening / closing game) is four times or more, “555” is The number of times of opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) is one of E to G having 5 times or more, “666” is the number of opening / closing times of the electric role winning door 371 (of the electric role opening / closing game) “777” is the number of times of opening / closing the electric winning door 371 (electric) Execution count of open game) it is considered that correspond to seven Hiroshi Figure per G.

  Here, FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation type table. As shown in FIG. 45, in the variation type table, the content of the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation display time are defined. For example, in the variation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result in the usual drawing lottery is “A per ordinary drawing” and the variation pattern is “01”, the variation type “normal reach effect pattern” and the variation display time “30 s”. Are associated. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command “B02” whose lottery result in the lottery per common figure is “B per common figure” and the fluctuation pattern is “02” includes the fluctuation display time “60 s” and the fluctuation type “super reach production pattern”. ”Is associated with the variation pattern command“ G03 ”in which the lottery result in the lottery per common map is“ G per common diagram ”and the variation pattern is“ 03 ”, the variation type“ special reach production pattern ” And the variable display time “90 s” are associated with each other. Furthermore, the variation type “non-reach effect pattern” and the variation display time “7s” correspond to the variation pattern command “H04” in which the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is “Out” and the variation pattern is “04”. The fluctuation pattern command “H05” with the lottery result in the lottery per common map being “off” and the fluctuation pattern “05” is attached to the fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern” and the fluctuation display time “10 s”. "Is associated.

  Further, FIGS. 46A to 46C are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 46A is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the normal figure variable game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 46B is a normal figure variable game. FIG. 46C is a super reach production pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual production type in the production is a super reach production. FIG. 46C shows a special reach production as the final individual production type in the ordinary variable game production. It is a special reach production pattern type selection table referred to in a certain case.

  In the present embodiment, the case where there are five types of effect pattern types corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but there may be six or more types of effect pattern types. In FIG. 46, the effect pattern type table when the variation type is “no reach” is omitted.

  In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 46 (A), “production pattern X1” to “production pattern” as production pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter in accordance with the lottery result in the lottery per regular drawing. X5 "is defined. In this embodiment, the lottery results in the lottery per common map are divided into four groups: A to D per universal map, E and F per universal map, G per universal map, and out. A production pattern type corresponding to the value of the production pattern type counter is set for each. It should be noted that the effect pattern type may be set individually corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type counter for each lottery result without grouping the lottery results in the lottery per common drawing. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. Select from the production pattern type selection table. Here, the effect pattern X1 to effect pattern X5 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table is an effect in which, for example, the normal reach effect in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state is executed after the high-speed variation effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed is executed. The final individual effect type is an effect that becomes a normal reach effect.

  In addition, in the super reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 46 (B), “production patterns Y1” to “production patterns Y1” to “ An effect pattern Y5 "is defined. In this embodiment, the lottery results in the lottery per common map are divided into four groups: A to D per universal map, E and F per universal map, G per universal map, and out. A production pattern type corresponding to the value of the production pattern type counter is set for each. It should be noted that the effect pattern type may be set individually corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type counter for each lottery result without grouping the lottery results in the lottery per common drawing. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result in the lottery per map. Select from the super reach production pattern type selection table. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y5 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and further expected as a final individual effect type than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that has a higher degree of execution and a longer production execution time than a normal reach production. In addition, the super reach production pattern type selection table may include a super reach production pattern production that develops into a super reach production after the high-speed fluctuation production is completed without going through the normal reach production.

  Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 46C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern types” corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per regular drawing. An effect pattern Z5 "is defined. In this embodiment, the lottery results in the lottery per common map are divided into four groups: A to D per universal map, E and F per universal map, G per universal map, and out. A production pattern type corresponding to the value of the production pattern type counter is set for each. It should be noted that the effect pattern type may be set individually corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type counter for each lottery result without grouping the lottery results in the lottery per common drawing. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is determined according to the lottery result in the lottery per map. Select from the special reach production pattern type selection table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z5 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect. It is an effect that develops into a special reach effect that has a higher expectation per figure than a reach effect and has a longer execution time than a normal reach effect. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without passing through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. May be.

<Steps S2504 and S2505>
Returning to FIG. 44, in step S2404, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is set as a fluctuation display time counter. The variation display time is determined according to information included in the variation pattern command. The variable display time counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2301 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 42, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed based on the variable display time counter. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the variable display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display time counter reaches zero. Then, the MPU 51 sets a display variation pattern command indicating the symbol combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and the variation type (effect pattern type) in the RAM 512 (step S2505).

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
In step S2506, the display variation pattern command set in step S2505 is output to the display control device 6. The ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores decorative image variation images and effect images corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, the variation type and the effect type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until the variable display time preset in the symbol display unit 341 elapses. The decorative pattern changes are displayed in order. On the other hand, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command during the decorative pattern variation display (step S21). S2507). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ordinary game effect start flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends the ordinary game effect processing.

[Game effect processing per ordinary figure]
Returning to the description of FIG. 42, in the game per game illustration process (step S <b> 2304) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the lighting unit 27, etc. execute the game effect per game in the general game. Processing is performed. For example, when the electric winning box door 371 is opened, the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the gaming board 31 and the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning port 376 of the electric winning device 37. For example, the player may be prompted to play a ball. The game effect per game is determined and started when the game effect start flag set to ON in step S2407 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. Further, in the game effect processing for each figure, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, an image indicating that the game ball 99 has been inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 may be displayed. Conceivable. Further, when displaying an image indicating that the game ball 99 has been inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376, an image indicating the remaining number of times that the electric winning winning door 371 is opened (electric open / close game is executed) is displayed. It is also possible to display at the same time. In addition, when the remaining number of times that the electric role winning door 371 is opened (the electric role opening / closing game is executed) is 0, an image indicating that the electric winning winning door 371 is finally opened may be displayed. It is also conceivable to determine an interval effect to be executed during the interval in case the jackpot game ends before the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 ends.

[Small hit game effect processing]
In the small hit game effect process (step S2005) of the sub timer interruption process, a process of causing the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electrical decoration unit 27, etc. to execute the small hit game effect in the small hit game is performed. Examples of the small hit game effect include an effect of urging the player to launch the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31 and enter the game ball 99 into the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38. The small hit game effect is determined and started when the small hit game effect start flag set to ON in step S2409 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set ON. Further, in the small hit game effect, for example, when the V winning flag set to ON in step S2411 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON, the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384. It is also possible to display an image indicating this.

[Big hit game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) of the sub timer interrupt process, a process of causing the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the electrical decoration section 27, etc. to execute the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game is performed. The jackpot game effect includes, for example, an opening effect, a round game effect, a variable winning interval effect, an ending effect, and the like. The jackpot game effect is determined and started when the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2413 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is set to OFF when starting the opening effect.

  The opening effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot game starts. For example, the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31 and the game ball 99 enters the variable winning port 394 of the variable winning device 39. Production to encourage the person. The opening effect is started after the jackpot game effect is determined. In the opening effect, for example, an image showing the number of jackpot games that have been executed since the game was started is displayed.

  The round game effect is an effect indicating that the variable prize opening 394 is opened. The round game effect is started when the round game start flag set to ON in step S2415 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. The round game start flag is set to OFF when starting a round game effect. Also, in the round game effect, for example, an image showing the current number of rounds, an image showing the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 394 in the round game, an image showing the number of balls played in the jackpot game, An image showing the cumulative number of balls played since the start of the winning game is displayed.

  The variable winning interval effect is an effect indicating an interval between round games. The variable winning interval effect is started when the variable winning interval start flag set to ON in step S2417 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. The variable winning interval start flag is set to OFF when starting the variable winning interval effect. It is also conceivable that the variable game interval effect is omitted and the round game effect is continuously executed in the variable prize interval.

  The ending effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot game ends. The process starts when the ending start flag set to ON in step S2419 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. The ending start flag is set to off when starting the ending effect. Also, in the ending effect, for example, an image showing the number of game balls acquired by entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in the jackpot game, an image showing the cumulative number of balls played from the start of the game per the normal figure, An image or the like indicating the number of jackpot games that have been executed since the start of the game is displayed. Also, in the ending effect, after the jackpot game is over, an image that clearly or suggests that the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 will be opened or closed because the game per game is being executed, or You may make it display the image which shows clearly or suggests that the opening of the electric winning box 371 of the electric winning device 37 is not performed because the game per figure is complete | finished.

  As described above, based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per winning figure is a win, the electric role opening / closing game per game is executed, and the game ball 99 to the electric winning award port 376 of the electric prize winning device 37 is played. A small hit game is executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the special drawing lottery executed with the winning of the winning is a small hit, and the game ball to the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game A jackpot game that allows the player to acquire a large amount of game balls based on 99 balls is executed. In other words, based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per lot is a win, a game cycle in which the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big win game of the per-draw game are executed in this order can be executed. In the present embodiment, when the electric winning / closing game is executed a plurality of times by opening / closing the electric winning winning door 371 having a plurality of types per common figure, until the next game cycle is started. On the condition that the previous game cycle is completed, that is, before the execution of the electric power open / close game of the game per normal figure in the next game cycle is started (the electric prize winning door 371 in the game per general figure is The game cycle can be executed a plurality of times on the condition that the jackpot game of the previous game cycle is completed within the interval between releases, and as a result, one game per game per game On the other hand, a large number of jackpot games can be executed.

  In the gaming machine 10, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) of the prescribed passage 35 (the operating time of the variable winning door 391) is the upper limit number of game balls 99 in the variable winning opening 394. It is set below the minimum time required to enter the ball. Therefore, normally, before the upper limit number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable prize opening 394, the variable prize opening 394 is closed as the maximum opening time elapses. As a result, it is possible to fix the time required for the round game in the jackpot game to the maximum opening time or equalize it to a time close to the maximum opening time, and further to fix or equalize the time required for the jackpot game. . As described above, since the time required for one game cycle can be fixed or equalized, the previous game cycle can be ended before the next game cycle is started. As a result, the big win game of the previous game cycle is started before the electric power open / close game of the game per normal figure in the next game cycle is started (within the interval between the opening of the electric prize winning door 371 in the game per normal figure). Can be terminated.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, in the electric power open / close game of a game per game, the electric power winning / opening opening 351 (electric power winning opening 376) is closed by elapse of a predetermined time (maximum opening time), thereby opening / closing the electric power. Similarly, the time required for the game is fixed, and similarly, the time required for the game for small hitting is determined by closing the V winning opening 352 (V winning port 384) after a predetermined time (maximum opening time) has elapsed in the small hitting game. Is fixed. In this way, by fixing the time required for the electric opening and closing game and the small hit game, it is possible to reduce variations in the time required for the game cycle, and thus more reliably in the next game cycle. The big hit game of the previous game cycle can be ended before the electric role opening and closing game is started (within the interval between opening of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per game).

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 is moved along the same path by the prescribed passage 35, so that the game ball 99 is moved to the right side of the game board 31 with a constant strength (stroke). In the case of launching into the area, the moving speeds of the game balls 99 moving along the prescribed passage 35 are made uniform, and the prescribed passage 35 is moved at a uniform interval. Since the variable winning opening 394 is provided at a position where a game ball moving in the prescribed passage 35 can enter, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region, the game ball 99 is launched in the round game of the big hit game. Until the game ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, the end condition of the round game of the jackpot game is that the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) elapses and the upper limit number (10) to the variable winning opening 394 as described above. If any of the incoming game balls 99 is filled, the game ball 99 is moved along the same path by the prescribed passage 35, so that the time required for the round game in the jackpot game is Furthermore, it is possible to ensure uniformization to the maximum opening time or even time close to the maximum opening time, and further to equalize the time required for the big hit game. As a result, the time required for one game cycle can be fixed or equalized, so that the previous game cycle can be terminated before the next game cycle is started. As a result, the big win game of the previous game cycle is started before the electric power open / close game of the game per normal figure in the next game cycle is started (within the interval between the opening of the electric prize winning door 371 in the game per normal figure). Can be terminated.

  In this way, the big win game of the previous game cycle before the start of the electric power open / close game of the game per normal figure in the next game cycle (within the interval between the opening of the electric prize winning door 371 in the game per normal figure). Can be completed, and when the type of per-common figure is one in which a plurality of electrification opening / closing games are executed by opening / closing the electrification winning door 371 a plurality of times, once per per ordinary figure It becomes possible to execute a large number of jackpot games for a game of the usual number.

  Furthermore, the big hit game of the previous game cycle can be ended before the electric open / close game in the next game cycle is started (within the interval between opening of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game). The occurrence of a situation where the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning prize opening 376 in the electric open / close game of the hit per game, In the winning game, the big win game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the big winning game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384 Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot enter the variable prize opening 394 due to the opening of the electric prize winning opening 376 in the electric opening / closing game Can be suppressed disadvantage is given to the player.

  In addition, the electric winning prize door 371 of the electric winning prize device 37 is provided with a plurality of guide portions 373 that delay the movement of the gaming ball 99 and increase the residence time of the gaming ball 99 in the electric winning prize door 371. Yes. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31, it is possible to maintain a state in which at least one game ball 99 moves on the electric winning winning door 371. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 is placed in the electric role winning opening 376 regardless of the opening / closing timing of the electric role winning door 371. Since the game is entered, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of a so-called puncture in which the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated is not executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the small hit game is not executed, and consequently the big hit game is not executed. When a game is to be executed, it becomes easy to execute the expected maximum number of jackpot games for one game per bonus game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, a prescribed passage 35 that defines a movement path of the game ball 99 launched in the right area of the game board 31 is provided, and the game ball 99 that moves through the prescribed passage 35 is a It is possible to enter the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37 in the electric opening and closing game, the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game, and the variable winning port 394 of the variable winning device 39 in the big hit game. It is. Therefore, the player simply continues the right-handed hitting of the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31 from the start of the game per normal figure, and the electric opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are sequentially arranged in this order. It is possible to execute a game cycle to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38, the right to execute the jackpot game is not generated when the jackpot game is being executed. However, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38, the currently executed jackpot game may be stopped, and a new jackpot game may be started, or the right to execute the jackpot game is granted. You may make it hold and hold the jackpot game suspended after completion | finish of the jackpot game in execution.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, in the opening / closing pattern of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game in B to G per game, all intervals are the same time (see FIG. 15), but all intervals are the same. The time of one or more intervals may be different from other intervals without taking time.

  In addition, the type per winning figure when the lottery result in the normal winning lottery is winning may be one in which the electric winning winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times for every drawing.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball 99 is inserted in the electric role winning opening 376 in a game per ordinary figure, a small hit is made by lottery per special figure based on the special figure winning / refusal table (see FIG. 17C). Whether or not the game is executed (whether or not the V winning opening 384 is opened) is determined, but the lottery per special drawing is omitted, and the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376 A small hit game may be executed.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, by opening the variable winning door in the round game of the jackpot game, when the game ball 99 moving in the prescribed passage 35 reaches the variable winning opening 353, the variable winning opening 394 is opened. The number of games that have been entered and the end condition of the round game is that the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable prize opening 353 (variable prize opening 394) has elapsed and the upper limit number (for example, 10) to the variable prize opening 394 The case where any one of the balls 99 is filled is described.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening (variable winning opening) as a condition for ending the round game of the jackpot game is short, for example, less than or equal to the game ball firing interval (0. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is set to 06 seconds to 0.6 seconds. As a result, the maximum opening time elapses before the upper limit number of game balls are detected before the upper limit number of game balls are detected as the end condition for the round game. Will not be closed, and the round game will be terminated by the elapse of the maximum opening time regardless of the maximum number of game balls entering the variable winning opening. In other words, in the present embodiment, each round game is ended in a so-called full open with the lapse of the maximum open time set in a short time, so that the time required for each round game is the maximum open time of the variable winning opening. To be fixed. As a result, the time required for the jackpot game is fixed by fixing the opening time and the ending time. Therefore, the electric winning door of the electric winning device is opened several times in one game per game (multiple When a role opening / closing game is executed), setting for ending the jackpot game in the interval between opening of the electric role winning doors becomes easy, and it is possible to reliably end the jackpot game in the interval between opening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, a retaining means for retaining a certain number of game balls in an area that can pass through the variable winning opening is provided, and when the variable winning opening is opened, the retaining means is retained. The game ball is different from the first embodiment in that the game ball is inserted into the variable winning opening. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable prize opening is opened once in a round game, a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means are entered into the variable prize opening. As a result, even when each round game is ended by a full open, it becomes possible to allow a certain number of game balls to enter the variable prize opening. Therefore, a disadvantage that can be caused by each round game being ended by a full open, that is, preventing a decrease in the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player due to a decrease in the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening. it can. In each round game, the variable prize opening may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the number of game balls retained by opening the variable winning opening for each round game is set to be less than the upper limit. For example, the number of game balls retained by opening a single variable prize opening in each round game is set to a value less than the upper limit divided by the number of variable prize openings opened in each round game. Is done.

  The staying means is obvious from the following description, but is not limited to the means for staying in a state in which the game ball is stopped, for example, by increasing the moving distance or reducing the moving speed. Means for delaying the movement of the sphere are also included.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 54, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. However, FIG. 49 to FIG. 54 are diagrams showing modifications in the present embodiment.

  47 (A) and 47 (B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is a groove that defines the moving path of the game ball 99 as a staying means. 395 is provided. The groove portion 395 meanders in the front-rear direction D1. Therefore, in the variable prize door 391, the game ball 99 moved from the left side to the variable prize door 391 is moved in the right direction while moving in the front-rear direction D1. That is, the game ball 99 passing through the variable winning door 391 is moved in the right direction while meandering, so that the moving distance is increased as compared with the case where the game ball 99 is moved linearly in the right direction. Here, the total length of the groove portion 395 (the moving distance of the game ball 99 at the variable winning door 391) is set to a length that allows a certain number of game balls 99 to stay. The predetermined number is, for example, 7 to 10, and is set to 9 in this embodiment. In this case, if the launch interval of the game balls 99 is 0.6 seconds, the total length of the groove 395 is set to a time during which the game balls 99 can stay for 5.4 seconds or more and less than 6 seconds. Further, the groove portion 395 can be integrally formed when the variable prize winning door 391 is formed by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the groove 395 in the variable winning door 391 can be suppressed.

  Note that the staying means for staying a certain number of game balls 99 in a region that can pass through the variable winning opening 353 in the big hit game is not limited to the meandering groove 395. For example, as the staying means, the variable winning door 391 is provided with a plurality of recesses or projections arranged in a dotted pattern such as a matrix to increase the movement resistance and reduce the moving speed of the game ball 99. Thus, a means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 in the variable prize winning door 391 may be used. The staying means is provided upstream of the variable winning door 391 or the variable winning door 391 by devising a plurality of recesses that can hold the game ball 99 provided in the variable winning door 391, the shape of the variable winning door 391, the control form, or the like. It may be a means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 or a means for holding a certain number of game balls 99 at or near the variable winning door 391 by magnetic force or electromagnetic force. A part of the modification of the staying means will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the game board 31 is formed with a penetrating portion 396 that allows the variable winning door 391 to move above the variable winning opening 394. The penetrating portion 396 allows the game ball 99 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the groove portion 395 of the variable winning door 391 when the variable winning door 391 is in the standby position. Further, the game board 31 is provided with an interference portion 397 so as to block the upper portion on the rear side of the through portion 396 above the variable winning door 391. When the variable winning door 391 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the interference unit 397 restricts the movement of the gaming ball 99 in the groove 395 so that the gaming ball 99 retained in the groove 395 is removed from the variable winning door 391. Has the role of dropping.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, when the game ball 99 is moving on the variable prize door 391, the variable prize door 391 is in the standby position (see FIG. 47B). ) To the operating position (see FIG. 48B), the game ball 99 of the variable winning door 391 interferes with the interference portion 397 fixed to the game board 31 and is more than the interference portion 397. Cannot move backwards. Therefore, the game ball 99 whose movement in the backward direction is restricted falls from the variable winning door 391. On the other hand, the variable winning opening 353 is opened by moving the variable winning door 391 to the operating position. As a result, when the variable winning door 391 is moved backward from the standby position to the operating position, the game ball 99 retained in the variable winning door 391 is transferred to the electric winning portion 372 through the variable winning opening 353. Entered.

  The variable winning door 391 is operated in each round game of the jackpot game, and the operating time thereof (the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning port 394)) is, for example, the launch interval of the game balls 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds) or less, for example, fixed at any time within the range of 0.1 to 1 time (0.06 seconds to 0.6 seconds) of the firing interval, preferably Is fixed at any time within the range of 0.2 to 0.8 times (0.12 to 0.48 seconds). That is, the operating time of the variable winning door 391 is that it is difficult for the gaming ball 99 moving upstream from the gaming ball 99 staying in the variable winning door 391 to pass through the variable winning opening 353, or at most one game. The time when the ball 99 passes through the variable winning opening 353 is set. As a result, in each round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls 99 passing through the variable prize opening 353 (the number of game balls 99 entering the variable prize opening 394) is set to a constant number or a substantially constant number. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) as the end condition of the jackpot game round game is a short time, for example, less than the firing interval of the game ball 99 (0.06). Seconds to 0.6 seconds). As a result, the maximum opening time elapses before the upper limit number of game balls 99 are detected in the variable prize opening 394 as the end condition of the round game. The variable winning opening 353 is not closed, and the round game is ended by the elapse of the maximum opening time regardless of the number of the game balls 99 that have reached the upper limit number to the variable winning opening 394. In other words, in the present embodiment, each round game is completed with a so-called full open as the maximum opening time set in a short time elapses. As a result, the time required for each round game is fixed to the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353, and as a result, the time required for the jackpot game is fixed. Thus, it is possible to easily equalize or fix the time of the game cycle in which the small hit and big hit games are executed in this order. Therefore, when the electric winning prize opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times by opening the electric winning prize winning door 371 of the electric winning prize winning device 37 multiple times in one game per game, the interval between the opening of the electric winning prize winning door 371 is The setting for ending the jackpot game at the interval becomes easy, and the jackpot game can be reliably ended at the interval between releases. Accordingly, in the game per hit, the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed due to the fact that the jackpot game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning prize opening 376, V Occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of a prize at the V prize opening 384 due to the fact that a jackpot game is being executed despite the game ball 99 having entered the prize opening 384, In the role opening / closing game, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the variable winning port 394 due to the opening of the electric winning port 376.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, a serpentine groove portion 395 (storing means) for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 is provided in a region where it is possible to enter the variable prize opening 353, and the variable prize opening 353 is provided. When released, a certain number of game balls 99 retained in the groove 395 are entered into the variable winning opening 394. As a result, even when each round game is ended by a full open, it becomes possible to allow a certain number of game balls to enter the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, there is a disadvantage that may occur when each round game is ended by a full open, that is, the number of game balls 99 that can be entered into the variable winning opening 394 decreases, so that the number of game balls 99 that a player can acquire decreases. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the big hit game is ended within the interval between opening, until the electric role winning door 371 of the next electric role winning device 37 is opened by the end of the interval between opening, the electric opening and closing game is started. In the meantime, there is a space period in which none of the electric prize winning door 371, the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 and the variable winning device 39 are operated. Similarly, a blank period occurs after execution of an 8R jackpot game with a small number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, even if the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31, the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37, the V winning port 384 and the normal winning port 385 of the V winning device 38, and the variable winning port. None of 394 can expect a game ball 99 to enter. For this reason, the player makes a stop to stop launching the game ball 99, increases the number N of the normal symbol variation display due to the passing of the game ball 99 to the through gate 317, or the game ball to the general winning opening 313. It is assumed that left-handed hitting of the game ball 99 is performed in the left region of the game board 31 in anticipation of the payout of the winning ball due to 99 entering.

  However, if the player is making a stop or left strike in the blank period, then when the electric role opening / closing game is started by opening the electric role winning port 376 of the electric role winning device 37, When the next electrification opening / closing game is started and the electrification winning door 371 is actuated, the game board 31 is delayed due to the launch of the game ball 99 to the right area of the game board 31 or due to clogging or defective launch. When the game ball 99 cannot reach the right area of the game, the game winning ball door 371 returns without the game ball 99 entering the game winning prize opening 376, and the game of opening and closing the game becomes possible. Concern about termination. When the electric role opening / closing game is finished without the game ball 99 entering the electric role winning opening 376, the lottery is not performed per special figure, so the small hit game is not executed, and as a result, the big win game Will not be executed. Therefore, if a player makes a stop or left strike during a blank period in which none of the electric opening and closing games, the small hit games, and the big hit games are being executed per game, it can be originally acquired in the jackpot game. The game ball 99 that should have been cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, using the blank period, a right-handed strong request effect that urges the player to make a right-handed hitting game ball 99 continuously in the right region of the game board 31 is executed. Can be considered. In this case, the right-handed strong request effect is preferably executed as a more intense effect than a normal right-handed request effect, for example, a right-handed request effect executed at the start of a game per game. Thereby, when the player makes a stop at the blank period, the game ball 99 will not be launched in time when the electric winning award port 376 of the electric winning device 37 is opened next time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a small hit game and thus a big hit game are not executed without the game ball 99 entering the electric winning prize opening 376.

  In addition, when it is confirmed that the player is making a stop during the blank period, it may be disadvantageous for the player to perform the stop, and a small hit game and thus a big hit game may not be executed. It is also conceivable to execute a stop-batch warning effect that stops the stop-batch and prompts the game ball 99 to hit the right-hand side because of the nature. In this case, it is preferable that the non-stop warning effect is executed as a more intense effect than the right-handed strong request effect in the blank period. Thereby, when the player is making a stop strike despite executing the right-handed strong demand effect during the blank period, it is even more important for the player to launch the game ball 99. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 is not launched in time, and the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric winning prize opening 376 and the small hit game and thus the big hit game is not executed.

  Note that whether or not the player is making a stop during the blank period is, for example, whether or not it is detected by the touch sensor 21a of the firing handle 22 that the player is touching the firing handle 22, or the firing handle. It can be determined by whether or not the firing is stopped by the 22 ball stop switch 21b.

  In addition, instead of or in addition to one or both of the right-handed strong request effect and the warning effect, the electric role winning opening 376 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened, so that the electric role opening / closing game is performed. It is also conceivable to perform a time effect that suggests or clearly indicates the remaining time until the start. As the time effect, for example, a timer effect that displays the remaining time until the start of the electric role opening and closing game, and a countdown effect that counts down to the start timing of the electric role opening and closing game are conceivable. When the time effect is executed in this way, it is easier to grasp the start timing of the electric role opening / closing game, so that it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a delay in launching the game ball 99 or the like.

  Here, as described above, the game ball 99 provided on the variable prize-winning door 391 can be held as a retaining means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 in an area that can pass through the variable prize opening 353 in the big hit game. A structure in which a certain number of game balls 99 are retained on the upstream side of the variable winning door 391 or on the variable winning door 391 by modifying the shape of the plurality of concave portions (variant 1), the shape of the variable winning door 391, the control form, etc. 2 and 3), a means (modification 4) for holding a certain number of game balls 99 by magnetic force or electromagnetic force can be considered. Hereinafter, these modified examples 1 to 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54.

<Modification 1>
As shown in FIG. 49, the staying means of Modification 1 is a plurality of recesses 398 that can hold a game ball 99 provided in the variable prize winning door 391. In the present embodiment, the number of recesses is nine. The plurality of recesses 398 have a triangular cross section and are grooves extending in the front-rear direction D <b> 1 on the front side of the variable prize winning door 391. The plurality of recesses 398 are continuously arranged in the left-right direction D3, and are formed in a step shape as a whole. In the plurality of recesses 398, the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398 has a higher ability to hold the game ball 99 than the other recesses 398. Specifically, the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398 is deeper than the other recesses 398, and the ability to hold the game ball 99 is increased. This is because the game ball 99 that has reached the variable winning door 391 next is held in the leftmost (upstream) recess 398 in a situation where the game ball 99 is held in the plurality of recesses 398 as will be described later. The game balls 99 in the plurality of recesses 398 are sequentially moved to the right (downstream) recess 398 by colliding with the ball 99, but the impact received by the game balls 99 held in the leftmost (upstream) recess 398 is received. Therefore, the holding force is set larger than that of the other recesses 398. Further, from the viewpoint of the magnitude of impact received by the game ball 99 held in the recess 398, it is conceivable that the holding force of the right side (downstream side) recess 398 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the game ball 99 that has moved from the left side (upstream side) of the defined passage 35 toward the variable prize door 391 rushes to the variable prize door 391. The game ball 99 reaching 391 has a high ability to hold the game ball 99 in the leftmost (upstream side) concave portion 398, so that the momentum is greatly attenuated. Thus, the game ball 99 that first reaches the variable prize door 391 is held in the leftmost (upstream) recess 398.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the game ball 99 that reaches the variable winning door 391 then collides with the game ball 99 held in the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398. As a result, the game ball 99 held in the leftmost (upstream) recess 398 is moved to the right (downstream) recess 398, and a new game ball 99 is placed in the leftmost (upstream) recess 398. Is retained. Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 50 (C) to 50 (F), the game ball 99 newly reaching the variable winning door 391 collides with the game ball 99 held in the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398. As a result, the game balls 99 are moved to the right side (downstream side) recess 398 in a chain. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the game balls 99 are held in all the recesses 398, and the new game ball 99 reaches the variable winning door 391 in this state, so that the rightmost (downstream) The game ball 99 in the recess 398 on the side) is pushed out, and this game ball 99 is moved toward the out port 354. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right region of the game board 31 toward the prescribed passage 35, a certain number (9 in the present embodiment) of game balls 99 are placed in the plurality of recesses 398 of the variable prize winning door 391. Stayed. Accordingly, as in the case where the meandering groove 395 is provided in the variable prize winning door 391, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the variable prize winning opening 394 even when each round game is ended by full opening. It becomes possible.

  Note that the plurality of recesses 398 need not be groove portions having a triangular cross section, and may be groove portions having a polygonal shape other than a triangular shape such as a semicircular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, and a square shape. Further, as long as the game ball 99 can be held on the variable winning door 391, other configurations can be adopted without being limited to the recesses.

<Modification 2>
As shown in FIGS. 51 (A) to 51 (C), the staying means of the modified example 2 passes through the variable winning opening 353 of the prescribed passage 35 in the big hit game according to the control state of the variable winning door 391. By switching between a state in which a certain number of game balls 99 can stay in a possible area and a state in which the game balls 99 retained in the variable prize opening 353 can pass, it is constant in each round game of the jackpot game A number of game balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394.

  The variable winning door 391 includes a base portion 391A that allows movement of the game ball 99 and a restriction portion 391B that restricts movement of the game ball 99, and is rotatable about a rotation shaft 391C. The base portion 391A has a plate shape capable of closing the variable winning opening 353. The restricting portion 391B extends downward from the tip of the base portion 391A. Therefore, the variable prize winning door 391 has a substantially L-shaped form.

  The variable winning door 391 is rotated in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 51A to 51C by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 at a predetermined timing of the jackpot game. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, in the variable prize door 391, except for the big hit game, the base part 391A closes the variable prize opening 353 of the prescribed passage 35, passes through the prescribed passage 35, and the variable prize door 391. Movement of the game ball 99 that has reached to the outlet 354 is permitted.

  On the other hand, the variable winning door 391 is moved from the standby position where the base portion 391A shown in FIG. 51 (A) closes the variable winning opening 353 at the first timing among the predetermined timings of the jackpot game. Is rotated clockwise to the first operating position shown in FIG. In the first operating position, the base portion 391A is located above the standby position, and the restricting portion 391B blocks the prescribed passage 35 in the vicinity of the upstream side of the variable winning opening 353, thereby restricting the movement of the game ball 99. It is a position to do.

  In addition, the variable winning door 391 starts from the first operating position where the restricting portion 391B shown in FIG. 51B restricts the movement of the game ball 99 at the second timing out of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. ) In the counterclockwise direction. The second operating position is a position where the variable prize opening 353 is opened to the extent that the game ball 99 can pass and the base portion 391A is inclined leftward. When the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 353 is guided to the left by the variable winning door 391.

  Here, in Modification 2, the variable winning portion 392 is a game ball 99 that is guided to the left by the base portion 391A through the variable winning opening 353 when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position. Is arranged on the left side of the tip of the variable winning door 391 in the second operating position so that the player can enter the ball. In other words, the variable winning portion 392 is arranged not at the bottom of the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35 but at a position shifted from the lower side of the variable winning opening 353 to the left side. The variable winning portion 392 has an upper opening 393 that allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394 and is guided toward the upper opening 393 by the variable winning door 391 in the second operating position. It has a stopper portion 392A that prevents the game ball 99 from exceeding the variable winning portion 392. Therefore, when the variable winning door 391 is rotated from the first operating position to the second operating position, the game ball 99 whose movement is restricted by the restricting portion 391B due to the variable winning door 391 being in the first operating position is variable. By opening the winning opening 353, the game ball 99 is guided to the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning portion 392 by the base portion 391A through the variable winning opening 353. As a result, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted at the first operating position are entered into the variable winning opening 394.

  Furthermore, the variable prize winning door 391 is moved from the second operating position where the variable prize opening 353 shown in FIG. 51C is opened at the third timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game to FIG. 51A. The variable winning opening 353 shown is rotated clockwise to a standby position where it is closed.

  In the second modification, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31 toward the prescribed passage 35, the movement of a certain number of game balls 99 is variable when the variable winning door 391 is in the first operating position. It is retained by being restricted by the door 391. On the other hand, when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted in the first operating position are inserted into the variable winning opening 394. Accordingly, as in the case where the meandering groove 395 is provided in the variable prize winning door 391, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the variable prize winning opening 394 even when each round game is ended by full opening. It becomes possible.

<Modification 3>
As shown in FIG. 52, in the same way as the staying means of the modification 2, the staying means of the modified example 3 has the variable winning opening 353 of the specified passage 35 in the big hit game in accordance with the control state of the payout winning door 391. By switching between a state in which a certain number of game balls 99 can stay in the passable area and a state in which the game balls 99 retained in the variable winning opening 353 can pass, in each round game of the jackpot game A certain number of game balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394.

  The variable prize winning door 391 can rotate around the rotation shaft 391D. The variable winning door 391 is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in FIGS. 52A to 52C by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 at a predetermined timing of the jackpot game. To be rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, in the variable prize door 391, except for the big hit game, the base part 391A closes the variable prize opening 353 of the prescribed passage 35, passes through the prescribed passage 35, and the variable prize door 391. Movement of the game ball 99 that has reached to the outlet 354 is permitted.

  On the other hand, the variable prize-winning door 391 starts from the standby position for closing the variable prize-winning opening 353 shown in FIG. 52A at the first timing among the predetermined timings of the jackpot game. It is rotated counterclockwise to the operating position. The first operating position is a position that restricts the movement of the game ball 99 by closing the prescribed passage 35 above the variable winning opening 353 with the tip of the variable winning door 391 positioned above the standby position. is there.

  In addition, the variable winning door 391 starts from the first operation position that restricts the movement of the game ball 99 shown in FIG. 52 (B) at the second timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game, and is shown in FIG. 52 (C). 2 Rotate clockwise to the operating position. The second operating position is a position where the variable prize opening 353 is opened to the extent that the game ball 99 can pass and the base portion 391A is inclined downward. When the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 353 is guided to the right by the variable winning door 391.

  Here, in the third modification, the variable winning portion 392 is a game ball that is guided to the right by the variable winning door 391 through the variable winning opening 353 when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position. 99 is arranged to the right of the tip of the variable winning door 391 in the second operating position so that it can enter the ball. In other words, the variable winning portion 392 is arranged not at the bottom of the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35 but at a position shifted from the lower side of the variable winning opening 353 to the right side. The variable winning portion 392 has an upper opening 393 that allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394 and is guided toward the upper opening 393 by the variable winning door 391 in the second operating position. It has a stopper portion 392A that prevents the game ball 99 from exceeding the variable winning portion 392. Therefore, when the variable winning door 391 is rotated from the first operating position to the second operating position, the game ball 99 whose movement is restricted by the variable winning door 391 because the variable winning door 391 is in the first operating position is: When the variable winning opening 353 is opened, the game ball 99 is guided to the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning portion 392 by the variable winning door 391 through the variable winning opening 353. As a result, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted at the first operating position are entered into the variable winning opening 394.

  Further, the variable prize winning door 391 is moved from the second operating position where the variable prize opening 353 shown in FIG. 52C is opened at the third timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game to FIG. 52A. The variable winning opening 353 shown is rotated counterclockwise to a standby position where it is closed.

  In the third modification, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31 toward the prescribed passage 35, the movement of a certain number of game balls 99 is variable when the variable winning door 391 is in the first operating position. It is retained by being restricted by the door 391. On the other hand, when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted in the first operating position are inserted into the variable winning opening 394. Accordingly, as in the case where the meandering groove 395 is provided in the variable prize winning door 391, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the variable prize winning opening 394 even when each round game is ended by full opening. It becomes possible.

<Modification 4>
As shown in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (C), the staying means of the modified example 4 holds a certain number of game balls 99 by an electromagnetic force generator 399 that generates an electromagnetic force. The electromagnetic force generating device 399 is disposed above the area corresponding to the variable winning device 39 in the defined passage 35. The electromagnetic force generation device 399 includes, for example, an electromagnet including a solenoid, and an electromagnetic force that causes attraction to the game ball 99 is generated by switching between a state in which power is supplied to the solenoid and a state in which power is not supplied to the solenoid. The state and the state where no electromagnetic force is generated are switched.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the electromagnetic force is not generated by the electromagnetic force generator 399 (the electromagnet is continuously turned off), it is driven into the right area of the game board 31 and the prescribed passage 35 The game ball 99 moves on the variable winning door 391. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53B, in the state where the electromagnetic force is generated by the electromagnetic force generator 399 (the electromagnet is on), the attractive force is applied to the game ball 99 by the electromagnetic force. When the game ball 99 that has moved to reach the variable prize door 391 is held in the area corresponding to the variable prize door 391 in the prescribed passage 35 and a certain time has passed since the electromagnetic force was generated. A certain number of game balls 99 are held. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls 99 held in the area corresponding to the variable prize door 391 in the prescribed passage 35 is five. In this case, assuming that the firing interval of the game balls 99 is 0.6 seconds, about 3 seconds (0.6 seconds × 5) have elapsed, and the area corresponding to the variable winning door 391 in the prescribed passage 35 is reached. The maximum number of game balls 99 is held.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), when the game ball 99 is held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 (the electromagnet is continuously turned on) and the electromagnetic force is not generated (the electromagnet is turned off). Then, a certain number of game balls 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 fall downward. At this time, when the variable prize opening 353 of the variable prize device 39 is operated to open the variable prize opening 353, the game ball 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 is changed to the variable prize opening. 394 is entered. That is, in the present embodiment, by controlling the timing at which the electromagnetic force generating device 399 generates an electromagnetic force and the timing at which the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is operated, a certain number of game balls 99 in the jackpot game. Can be retained, and the retained game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, in the jackpot game, the variable winning opening 353 is opened at a predetermined interval for a predetermined time by operating for a predetermined time when the variable winning door 391 is fixed at a predetermined interval. Opened. On the other hand, in the electromagnetic force generation device 399, the electromagnet is turned on for a predetermined time from a predetermined timing before the variable winning opening 353 is opened, so that the game ball 99 that has reached the variable winning door 391 has only a fixed time. Electromagnetic force is applied. The predetermined timing at which the electromagnet is turned on is the maximum number of game balls in an area corresponding to the variable prize door 391 in the prescribed passage 35, rather than the operation start timing of the variable prize door 391 (the timing of opening the variable prize opening 353). 99 is the timing before 99 (for example, 3 to 5 seconds). Moreover, the timing at which the electromagnet is turned off coincides with the operation start timing of the variable winning door 391, for example. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 from starting to fall after the variable winning opening 353 is closed. As a result, a situation in which the game ball 99 cannot pass through the variable winning opening 353 and the game ball 99 cannot enter the variable winning port 394 can be prevented. The operation end timing of the variable winning door 391 (the closing timing of the variable winning opening 353) is such that the game ball 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 can pass through the variable winning opening 353 from the operation start timing. It is the timing when more than the minimum time has passed. Thereby, while the variable winning opening 353 is opened, the game ball 99 held in the electromagnetic force generating device 399 can be passed through the variable winning opening 353, and the variable winning opening 394 has a game. A ball 99 can be entered.

  Note that the operation end timing of the variable winning door 391 (the closing timing of the variable winning opening 353) is preferably set to a timing at which a time equal to or shorter than the firing interval of the game balls 99 elapses from the operation start timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 not held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 from entering the variable winning opening 394 through the variable winning opening 353. Conversely, in order to allow a game ball 99 not held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 to pass through the variable winning opening 353 and enter the variable winning opening 394, the operation of the variable winning door 391 ends. The timing may be set to a timing at which a time exceeding the firing interval of the game balls 99 elapses from the operation start timing.

  Note that the opening timing of the variable winning door 391 does not have to be completely coincident with the timing of turning off the electromagnet, and the game ball 99 falling when the electromagnet is turned off passes through the variable winning opening 353. What is necessary is just to set in the range which can enter the variable winning opening 394, and it may be a little early or a little later than the timing which turns off an electromagnet, and it should just be a timing substantially corresponding to the timing which turns off an electromagnet.

  In the modified example 4, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31 toward the specified passage 35 in the jackpot game, it is defined by the electromagnetic force generated by turning on the electromagnet of the electromagnetic force generating device 399. A maximum number (a fixed number) of game balls 99 are held in an area corresponding to the variable prize door 391 in the passage 35. The fixed number of game balls 99 held by the electromagnetic force generating device 399 pass through the variable winning opening 353 and the variable winnings when the electromagnet is turned off and the variable winning door 391 is operated for a predetermined time. A ball is entered into the mouth 394. Therefore, even if each round game is ended by a full open, it becomes possible to allow a certain number of game balls to enter the variable winning opening 394.

  Note that the electromagnetic force generation device 399 is not necessarily provided along the upper side of the prescribed passage 35, and may be provided on the back side of the variable prize winning door 391, for example. Further, by incorporating a solenoid in the variable prize door 391 and configuring the variable prize door 391 as an electromagnetic force generator 399, the game ball 99 is retained in the variable prize door 391 by the electromagnetic force applied by the variable prize door 391. Also good.

  Further, instead of the electromagnetic force generator 399, a movable magnet may be adopted as the staying means. For example, it is possible to change in a big hit game by arranging a magnet so as to be movable between an operation position where the game ball 99 is retained by applying a magnetic force to the game ball 99 and a standby position where no magnetic force is applied to the game ball 99. It is also conceivable to allow a certain number of game balls 99 in an area that can pass through the winning opening 353.

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. It is not a thing. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, A gaming machine, wherein the third game is executed in an interval between the first switching games.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A1, the first game is executed based on the establishment of the first specific condition, the second game is executed based on the establishment of the second specific condition, and the game is executed based on the establishment of the third specific condition. A third game in which a privilege can be given to the person is executed. Here, the second specific condition can be established when the game ball enters the first entrance, and the third specific condition is established when the game ball enters the second entrance. . That is, the second specific condition can be satisfied in the first switching game of the first game, and the third specific condition can be satisfied in the second switching game of the second game. In addition, the third game is executed at an interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the number of times of execution of the first switching game is a plurality of times, the first switching game and the second game are performed as long as the second specific condition and the third specific condition are satisfied according to the number of times of execution of the first switching game. And the third game is repeatedly executed. In other words, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times due to the establishment of the first specific condition, the third game in which the player can acquire a privilege can be executed according to the number of times of execution of the first switching game. There is provided a gaming machine having excellent gaming properties. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is determined to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of third switching games as the third game, the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. In addition, the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Accordingly, for example, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. . As a result, in the first switching game, the situation where the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture) or the first switching game is executed. Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance is prevented, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, wherein the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than a total time of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. .

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Instead, the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even when the second game is executed before the third game is executed, the third game can be ended at an interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably giving an unnecessary disadvantage to a player.

[Appendix A4]
A second game determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute the second game based on the game ball entering the first entrance (376);
The second specific condition is that a game ball enters the first entrance (376) and the second game determination means (41) determines that the second game is to be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A4, the second specific condition for causing the second game to be switched to the second permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second entrance is the first entrance It is determined that the second game is to be executed by the second game determination means based on the game ball being entered. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game. In addition, when a game ball enters the first entrance, it can be enjoyed by paying attention to the determination result of the second game determination means executing the second game.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4, wherein the third specific condition is that a game ball enters the second entrance (384).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A5, the third specific condition for causing the third game to be switched to the third permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the third entrance is the second entrance A game ball is inserted into the game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second entrance in the second switching game.

[Appendix A6]
First game determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute the first game based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area (317) set in the game board (31) is further provided. ,
The first specific condition is that a game ball passes through the specific area (317) and the first game determination means (41) determines that the first game is to be executed. To Attached A5.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A6, the first specific condition for executing the first game to be switched to the first permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the first entrance is that the game ball is in the specific area. It is determined that the first game is executed by the first game determination means based on passing. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it can be enjoyed by paying attention to the determination result of the first game determination means executing the first game.

[Appendix A7]
The first entrance (376), the second entrance (384), and the third entrance (394) can enter a game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31). Provided in a position,
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area (317) is provided at a position through which a game ball launched into the left area of the gaming board (31) can pass.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, it is necessary to execute a so-called left-handed strike, in which a game ball is launched into the left region of the game board in order to establish the first specific condition for executing the first game. Further, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the second specific condition for executing the second game and the third specific condition for executing the third game are satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player. In the third game to be obtained, it is necessary to execute a so-called right strike, in which a game ball is launched in the right region of the game board in order to enter the game ball into the third entrance. That is, a game property in which left-handed and right-handed are divided between a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player until the first game is executed and a gaming state in which the first to third games that are advantageous to the player are executed. Is granted.

[Appendix A8]
Further comprising route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route,
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in 1.

  By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is one that can acquire a large amount of game balls by putting the game balls into a variable winning opening that is opened in a jackpot game advantageous to the player. In this type of game, it is generally possible to enter a game ball through a plurality of routes with respect to a variable winning opening. However, when a game ball can enter the variable winning opening through a plurality of routes, the time from when the game ball is launched until the gaming ball enters the variable winning opening becomes uneven. The time required for the jackpot game is uneven. In addition, when a game ball can enter the variable prize opening through a plurality of routes, the game ball moving along a route different from the plurality of paths that can win a prize becomes a useless ball that does not enter the variable prize opening. The occurrence of the useless balls not only causes the time required for the jackpot game to be non-uniform, but also reduces the number of difference balls in the jackpot game, resulting in a disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A8, the game balls launched into the predetermined area are moved along the same path by the path defining means, so that the game balls are moved to the predetermined area of the game board with a constant strength (stroke). In the case of launching, the moving speeds of the game balls moving along the moving path defined by the path defining means are made uniform among the game balls, and along the moving path defined by the path defining means at a uniform interval. Moving. And since the 3rd entrance is provided in the position which can enter a game ball which moves along a movement course specified by a course definition means, when a game ball is launched to a predetermined field, the 3rd game In the third switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the third entrance is made uniform between the game balls and the occurrence of useless balls is prevented. Therefore, for example, as a condition for ending the third switching game of the third game, for example, a predetermined time elapses after the third permitted state is set, or a game ball with a number greater than or equal to the upper limit is entered at the third entrance. If the game ball is moved along the same route by the route defining means, the time required for the third switching game is uniform because the game ball is uniformly inserted into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. As a result, when the first game is executed, the time required for the game cycle of the first game, the second game, and the third game is equalized, so the third game is terminated in the interval between the first switching games. It becomes easy to make. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the first switching game from being started in the first game while the interval of the first switching game is ended during the execution of the third game and the third game is being executed. For this reason, in the game per hit, the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed due to the fact that the game hit ball 99 is executed even though the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376, V Occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of a prize at the V prize opening 384 due to the fact that a jackpot game is being executed despite the game ball 99 having entered the prize opening 384, In the role opening / closing game, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the variable winning port 394 due to the opening of the electric winning port 376.

  Further, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the third entrance, so that it is defined by the route defining means while being in the third allowable state. All of the game balls that have moved along the moving route and have reached a position where they can enter the third entrance can be entered into the third entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may occur when a configuration in which a game ball can enter the third entrance through a plurality of routes, that is, a waste ball that does not enter the third entrance, can be prevented. . Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by the useless ball which is not entered into the 3rd entrance, for example, reduction of the number of difference balls, can be suppressed.

[Appendix A9]
The third entrance (394) is provided below the third electric accessory means (391),
The third electric accessory means (391) includes a third opening (353) provided above the third entrance (394) in the route defining means (35). 353) is closed, and the third restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394) and the third opening (353) are opened. The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the gaming machine is movable between a third permissible position (operating position) that permits entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the third electric accessory means is moved to open or close the third opening provided in the route defining means, thereby restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the third entrance. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the third restricted state and the third permissible state with a simple configuration in which a third opening is provided in the route defining means and the third opening is opened and closed by the third electric accessory means. The time required for the third game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above disadvantages can be prevented from being given to the player.

[Appendix A10]
The second entrance (384) is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. Or the gaming machine of appendix A9.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, the second entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, so that the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the game ball entering the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as an end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, when a predetermined time elapses after the second allowed state is set, or more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the second entrance. When it is set to be balled, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. Thereby, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval of the first switching game is ended during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is being executed. In addition, since the execution of the first switching game in the first game can be easily prevented, it is possible to suppress the above-described disadvantages from being given to the player.

  Furthermore, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while being in the second allowable state. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving route and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can enter the second entrance, enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the useless balls. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement route defined by the route defining means and have reached a position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a game ball is not entered at the second entrance (so-called puncture). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix A11]
The second entrance (384) is provided below the second electric accessory means (381),
In the second opening (352) provided above the second entrance (384) in the route defining means (35), the second electric accessory means (381) is provided in the second entrance port. The second restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the (384) and the second permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the second entrance (384). The gaming machine according to appendix A10, wherein the gaming machine is movable between

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A11, the second electric accessory means is moved to open or close the second opening provided in the route defining means, thereby restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the second entrance. Is done. Therefore, the second restricting state and the second permissible state can be switched by a simple configuration in which a second opening is provided in the route defining means and the second opening is opened and closed by the second electric accessory means. The time required for the second game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above disadvantages can be prevented from being given to the player.

[Appendix A12]
The first entry opening (376) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the moving route defined by the route defining means (35) can be entered. To Addendum A11.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, the first ball entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, so that the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball is not entered at the first entrance in the first switching game of the first game (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture, and consequently the third specific condition is not satisfied. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix A13]
The first entrance (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371),
In the first opening (351) provided above the first entrance (376) in the route defining means (35), the first electric accessory means (371) The first restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the (376) and the first permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the first entrance (376). The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the gaming machine is movable between

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, the first electric accessory means is moved to open or close the first opening provided in the route defining means, thereby restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the first entrance. Is done. For this reason, the first restriction state and the first permissible state can be switched by a simple configuration in which the path defining means is provided with the first opening and the first opening is opened and closed by the first electric accessory means. The time required for the first game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above disadvantages can be prevented from being given to the player.

[Appendix A14]
The first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384) are provided at positions where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. And
The game balls moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) are the first entrance (376), the second entrance (384), and the third entrance ( 394) The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where a ball can be preferentially entered in the order of 394).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, if two or more of the first electric accessory means, the second electric accessory means, and the third electric accessory means are operated in duplicate, the first entrance port, Game balls can be entered in the priority order of the second entrance and the third entrance. Therefore, when the first game is executed due to the establishment of the first specific condition, the establishment of the second specific condition has the highest priority, and then the establishment of the third specific condition has priority. That is, the winning priority order of the game balls at the first entrance, the second entrance, and the third entrance is set with the highest priority on the execution of the third game. Thereby, the player can obtain the maximum benefit obtained by executing the third game.

[Appendix A15]
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time elapses after switching to the third permissible state, and that an upper limit number of game balls are entered in the third entrance (394) in the third permissible state. That one of the conditions is met,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the predetermined time is set to be equal to or shorter than a minimum time required to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance (394).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, when switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state in the third switching game, a predetermined time until switching to the third restricted state, that is, the game ball to the third entrance The maximum allowable time for entering the ball is set to be equal to or shorter than the minimum time required for allowing the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance (394). That is, before the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the third entrance, the third restricted state is established by the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time). Therefore, the upper limit number of game balls can be prevented from being changed from the third allowed state to the third restricted state before the predetermined time (maximum allowed entry time) has elapsed by entering the third entrance. Thereby, the execution time of the third switching game can be made uniform, and further, the execution time of the third game can be made uniform, so that it is easy to end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the first switching game interval from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. In one switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture), or when the first switching game is executed, the third entry It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the mouth.

[Appendix A16]
The predetermined time is set to be equal to or shorter than a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the upper limit number (for example, 10). Gaming machine.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to appendix A16, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 0.5 times or more and 1 time or less of a time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game balls by the upper limit number.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to appendix A17, wherein the predetermined time is set to be not less than 0.75 times and not more than 0.95 times the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game balls by the upper limit number.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A16 to appendix A18, the predetermined time is equal to or less than a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit number, for example, 0.5 times or more of a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit number. It is set to 1 times or less, preferably 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less. Therefore, the third switching game is terminated when the predetermined time elapses, while preventing the number of game balls entering the third entrance from being reduced significantly with respect to the upper limit number within the predetermined time. Can be made. Accordingly, the first switching game can be more surely ensured by ensuring a sufficient profit given to the player in the third game and uniformizing the time required for the third switching game and thus the time required for the third game. The third game can be ended at intervals.

[Appendix A19]
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time elapses after switching to the third permissible state, and that an upper limit number of game balls are entered in the third entrance (394) in the third permissible state. That one of the conditions is met,
The gaming machine as set forth in appendix A1, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding a minimum time required to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance (394) .

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A19, in the third switching game, when switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state, a predetermined time until switching to the third restricted state, that is, the gaming ball to the third entrance The maximum allowable time for entering a ball that is allowed to enter is set to a time that exceeds the minimum time required to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance. As a result, there is a possibility that the upper limit number of game balls enter the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum entrance allowable time) elapses, thereby switching from the third allowable state to the third restricted state. Get higher. When the upper limit number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum entry allowance time) elapses, the third allowance state is switched to the third restriction state. Since the time required for the switching game is shorter than the case where the predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time) has elapsed and the third restricted state is set, the time required for the third game can also be shortened. Therefore, by shortening the time required for the third game, it is possible to easily end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Accordingly, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game, it is possible to easily execute the third game a plurality of times.

  In addition, by ending the third game in the interval between the first switching games, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game, and the first game in the first game during the execution of the third game. It is possible to prevent the execution of the 1-switching game from being started. As a result, in the first switching game, the situation where the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture) or the first switching game is executed. Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance is prevented, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

  Further, when the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum entry allowance time) elapses, the third restricted game has a third state. The number of game balls that enter the entrance is increased as compared to the case where the third restriction state is reached due to the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time). Therefore, when the privilege given to the player in the third switching game is payout of the game ball with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the third entrance, the player can play the maximum number of game balls in the third switching game. The number of game balls that can be acquired and can be acquired in the third game increases. This suppresses a player's disadvantage that can occur when the third allowable state is switched to the third restricted state due to the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time), that is, a decrease in benefits (game balls) that can be acquired. And it can prevent that the interest of a game falls.

[Appendix A20]
In the supplementary note A19, the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the shooting interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the upper limit number (for example, 10). The gaming machine described.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the predetermined time is set to be more than 1 time and not more than 1.5 times a time obtained by multiplying the firing interval by the upper limit number.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to appendix A21, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less of a time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game balls by the upper limit number.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A20 to appendix A22, the predetermined time exceeds a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of the game balls by the upper limit number, for example, more than 1 time of a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of the game balls by the upper limit number. It is set to 5 times or less, preferably 1.1 times to 1.3 times. Therefore, when the upper limit number of game balls enter the third entrance, and the third restricted state is entered, the time from the third allowed state to the third restricted state is set to the predetermined time. It is preventing that it becomes remarkably short compared with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the third game from being significantly shortened. Therefore, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times in the first game, the first switching game is next performed after the third game is completed. It is possible to shorten the blank period that occurs before the start of.

  By the way, when the blank period becomes longer, it is assumed that the player makes a stop to stop the launch of the game ball in order to prevent the decrease of the possessed game ball due to the launch of the game ball. If a stop-attack is made during the blank period until the first switching game is started, the launch of the game ball is delayed with respect to the start of the first switch game, or the game ball does not arrive in the predetermined area due to the occurrence of launch failure Due to the occurrence of a situation or the like, a game ball may not enter the first entrance in the first switching game, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the third game that can give a privilege to the player is not executed. On the other hand, since the blank period can be shortened, stoppage in the blank period can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not entered at the first entrance in the first switching game due to a delay in launching the game ball, and thus it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A19 to appendix A22, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or longer than a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is determined to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of third switching games as the third game, the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. In addition, the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Accordingly, for example, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. . As a result, in the first switching game, the situation where the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture) or the first switching game is executed. Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance is prevented, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or greater than a sum of a theoretical maximum time of the second gaming state and a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A24, since the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game, Instead, the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even when the second game is executed before the third game is executed, the third game can be ended at an interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably giving an unnecessary disadvantage to a player.

[Appendix A25]
Further comprising route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route,
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially the same as or less than the interval.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A25, since the game balls launched into the predetermined area are moved along the same route defined by the route defining means, the movement of the game balls moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means The speed is equalized between the game balls. And since the 3rd entrance is provided in the position which can enter the game ball which moves along the regulation course by a course regulation means, when a game ball is struck into a predetermined field, the 3rd of the 3rd game In the switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the game ball entering the third entrance is equalized between the game balls. For this reason, as a condition for ending the third switching game of the third game (third predetermined condition), for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the third permitted state was established, and more than the upper limit number of game balls have entered the third entrance. When it is set to be balled, the time required for the third switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. In particular, when it is determined that the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game is executed as the third game because the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially equal to or less than the interval, for example, Even if the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required, the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the first switching game interval from ending during execution of the third game and starting the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. In one switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture), or when the first switching game is executed, the third entry It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the mouth.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is not less than 0.8 times and not more than 0.99 times the interval.

[Appendix A27]
The gaming machine according to appendix A26, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is not less than 0.85 times and not more than 0.95 times the interval.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A26 and Supplementary Note A27, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 0.99 times or less, preferably 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less shorter than the interval. Thus, there is a high possibility that the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably that a disadvantage is given to a player.

[Appendix A28]
The game according to appendix A25 to appendix A27, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 1 time or less of a time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval. Machine.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A28, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less of a time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix A28 and appendix A29, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is shorter than the remaining time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval, and is 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times the remaining time. It is set to the following, preferably 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less. Therefore, not only the third game but also the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, even when the second game is executed before the third game is executed, the third game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably giving an unnecessary disadvantage to a player.

[Appendix A30]
Note that the second entrance (384) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. To the appendix A29.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A30, the second entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, so that the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the game ball entering the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as an end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, when a predetermined time elapses after the second allowed state is set, or more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the second entrance. When it is set to be balled, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. Thereby, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval of the first switching game is ended during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is being executed. In addition, since the execution of the first switching game in the first game can be easily prevented, it is possible to suppress the above-described disadvantages from being given to the player.

  Furthermore, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while being in the second allowable state. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving route and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can enter the second entrance, enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the useless balls. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement route defined by the route defining means and have reached a position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a game ball is not entered at the second entrance (so-called puncture). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix A31]
From the supplementary note A25, the first entrance (376) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A29.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A31, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball is not entered at the first entrance in the first switching game of the first game (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture, and consequently the third specific condition is not satisfied. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix A32]
First game determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the determination condition (lottery per common figure);
A determination result display means (361) for displaying a determination result by the first game determination means (41);
Display control means (41) for controlling display contents on the determination result display means;
Further comprising
When it is determined that the first game is to be executed, the first game determination means (41) determines the number of execution times (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game. ,
The display control means (41) is determined by the first game determination means (41) when the first game determination means (41) determines that the first game is to be executed. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the determination result display means (361) displays contents reflecting the number of times the game has been executed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A32, when the number of times of execution of the first switching game is a plurality of times, as long as the second specific condition and the third specific condition are satisfied according to the number of times of execution of the first switching game, the first The switching game, the second game, and the third game are repeatedly executed. That is, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times due to the establishment of the first specific condition, a third game in which the player can acquire a privilege is executed according to the number of executions of the first switching game. There is provided a gaming machine having excellent gaming properties. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play. Then, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is determined by the first game determination unit, and the determination result by the first game determination unit including the number of executions is displayed on the determination result display unit. Therefore, the player can grasp the determination result by the first game determination means by the determination result display means, and when the determination result is to execute the first game, the player can determine the number of times of execution of the first switching game in the first game. I can grasp. And since the frequency | count of the 1st switching game in a 1st game can be grasped | ascertained, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the maximum frequency | count of the 3rd game in which a privilege can be acquired. This adds to the new gameability the gameability that can grasp the maximum number of executions of the third game for which benefits can be obtained, thereby increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game and increasing the player's game motivation. It becomes possible to improve further. Furthermore, for example, it is possible to predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game will be executed after the end of the third game, so that the degree of interest and interest in the game is improved, and the first game of the first game after the end of the third game When a 1-switch game is executed, it can be predicted that a game ball needs to enter the first entrance, so the third game is executed when no game ball enters the first entrance. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of not being done.

[Appendix A33]
The display control means (41) causes the determination result display means (361) to display a number that matches the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix A32, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A33, since the number matched with the number of times of execution of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means is displayed on the determination result display means, the player can execute the number of times of execution of the first switching game. Can be grasped directly and easily. Thereby, for example, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, thereby improving the degree of interest and interest in the game, and the first game after the end of the third game. When the first switching game of the game is executed, it can be easily predicted that it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first entrance, so that the game ball is not entered into the first entrance. The disadvantage that the third game is not executed is more reliably prevented.

[Appendix A34]
A symbol display means (341) on which the decorative symbol indicating the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variably displayed;
A symbol display control means (51) for controlling display contents on the symbol display means (341);
Further comprising
The symbol display control means (51)
Display the determination result by the first game determination means (41),
Contents reflecting the number of times of execution of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) when the first game determination means (41) determines that the first game is to be executed. Is displayed on the symbol display means (341). The gaming machine according to appendix A32 or appendix A33,

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A34, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is displayed on the symbol display means on which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in addition to the determination result display means. Therefore, the player can grasp the determination result by the first game determination means by the symbol display means, and can enjoy the game while paying attention to the symbol display means. Further, in a gaming machine provided with both the determination result display means and the symbol display means, the symbol display means is usually arranged more prominently than the determination result display means. Therefore, the player can easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game will be executed after the end of the third game, for example, as compared with the case where attention is paid to the determination result display means. When the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the game, it can be easily predicted that it is necessary to make the game ball enter the first entrance. Accordingly, it is possible to more easily prevent the disadvantage that the third game is not executed because the game ball is not entered into the first entrance.

[Appendix A35]
The symbol display control means (51) causes the decorative symbol to be displayed on the effective line set in the symbol display means (341), with the number matched with the number of executions of the first switching game as a flat eye. The gaming machine according to appendix A34, characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A35, since the number that matches the number of times of execution of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means is displayed as a doublet, the decorative symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, so that the player is the first The number of executions of the switching game can be grasped more directly and more easily. Accordingly, when the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, it can be more easily predicted that the game ball needs to enter the first entrance, so the first Occurrence of the disadvantage that the third game is not executed due to the game ball not entering the entrance is further reliably prevented.

[Appendix A36]
When the symbol display control means (51) displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display control means (51) in a variable manner, the determination result in the first game determination means (41) in the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to appendix A34 or appendix A35, wherein a game effect that suggests or clearly indicates is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A36, in the symbol display means in which the determination result in the first game determination means is displayed as a decoration symbol, the determination result in the first game determination means is suggested or indicated during the decorative symbol variation display. A game production is executed. Thereby, the player can predict and enjoy the possibility that the determination result causes the first game to be executed while paying attention to the game effect until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A32 to appendix A36, wherein the selection rate is set to be lower for the first game with a larger number of executions of the first switching game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A37, the selection rate is set lower for the first switching game with the larger number of executions of the first switching game. On the other hand, the greater the number of executions of the first switching game, the greater the number of times the third game is executed during the execution of the first game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to obtain a determination result with a large number of executions of the first switching game.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the first electric accessory means (371) includes a delay unit (373) that delays movement of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371). .

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A38, a delay unit is provided in the first electric accessory means for restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the first entrance. Therefore, when the game ball moves through the first electric combination means, the delay time can ensure a long residence time of the game ball in the first electric combination means. Thereby, possibility that a game ball will enter into the 1st starting opening can be raised. As a result, the possibility of the second game being executed is increased by increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the first entrance is established, and further, The possibility that the third specific condition that is established when the game ball enters the second entrance is satisfied is increased, and the third game in which a privilege can be given to the player may be executed. Is increased. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the third game in which a privilege can be given to the player. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein a residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is equal to or longer than a launch interval of the game balls.

[Appendix A40]
The gaming machine according to appendix A39, wherein a residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is not less than 1 and not more than 5 times a launch interval of the game balls.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is not less than 1 and not more than 3 times the launch interval of the game balls.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix A39 to appendix A41, the residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means is not less than the launch interval of the game ball, for example, not less than 1 and not more than 5 times the launch interval of the game ball, preferably the game ball 1 to 3 times the firing interval. Therefore, when game balls are continuously launched toward the first electric accessory means, a state where at least one game ball stays on the first electric accessory means is maintained. As a result, when the first electric accessory means is operated in the first switching game, the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means can be made to enter the first entrance. The possibility that the second game is executed is further increased by further increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the first entrance is established, and as a result, The possibility that the third specific condition that is established when the game ball enters the second entrance will be further increased, so that the third game in which a privilege can be given to the player may be executed. Is further enhanced. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, the possibility of executing the third game that can give a privilege to the player can be further increased. Providing profits can be further suppressed.

[Appendix A42]
The game machine according to any one of appendix A38 to appendix A41, wherein the delay unit moves the game ball along a meandering path in the first electric accessory means (371).

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to appendix A42, wherein the delay unit (373) includes a guide unit that changes a moving direction of the game ball in a forward direction or a backward direction.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A42 and Supplementary Note A43, the movement of the game ball in the first electric accessory means is delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration, and the time for the game ball to stay in the first electric accessory means is lengthened. can do. For example, when the first electric combination means is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the first electric combination means by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix A44]
Further comprising route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route,
The first entry opening (376) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can be entered. To Attached A43.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, the moving path of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined as the same path by the path defining means, so that the moving speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is made uniform. This makes it possible for the game ball to be present at a position where it can enter the first entrance at an interval substantially corresponding to the launch interval of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball does not enter the first entrance. As a result, the occurrence of the situation that the second specific condition or the third specific condition is not satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied is suppressed, and thus the occurrence of the situation where the profit obtained by the execution of the third game cannot be enjoyed is suppressed. it can.

[Appendix A45]
The first entrance (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371),
The gaming machine according to appendix A43, wherein the first electric accessory means (371) is provided in the route defining means (35).

[Appendix A46]
In the first opening (351) provided above the first entrance (376) in the route defining means (35), the first electric accessory means (371) A first restriction position (standby position) for restricting entry of game balls into (376), and a first allowance position (operation position) for allowing entry of game balls into the first entrance (376). The gaming machine according to appendix A45, wherein the gaming machine is movable between the two.

[Appendix A47]
The first restricted position is a position for closing the first opening (351),
The gaming machine according to appendix A46, wherein the first permissible position is a position where the first opening (351) is opened.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix A45 to appendix A47, the moving speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined as the same path by the path defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform. It is possible to always retain a certain number of game balls. Thereby, when it is set as the 1st permissible state, since the game ball retained in the 1st electric accessory means can be surely entered into the 1st entrance, after the 1st specific condition is established, The occurrence of the situation where the 2 specific condition and the third specific condition are not satisfied can be more reliably suppressed, and as a result, the occurrence of the situation where the profit obtained by the execution of the third game cannot be enjoyed can be more reliably suppressed.

[Appendix A48]
The first entrance (376) is provided in a first entrance (372) having a first upper opening,
The first electric accessory means (371) is movable in the front-rear direction between the first restriction position covering the first upper opening and the first allowable position opening the first upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A38 to appendix A47, which is characterized by the above.

[Appendix A49]
The game ball retained in the first electric accessory means (371) is dropped toward the first upper opening when moving backward from the first restriction position to the first permissible position. The gaming machine according to appendix A48, characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A48 and Supplementary Note A49, the first electric accessory means is moved from the first restricted position to the first permissible position, so that the game ball moving the first electric accessory means falls and the first A ball is inserted into the first entrance through the upper opening, and as a result, a game ball enters the first entrance. For this reason, it becomes easy to allow the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means to enter the first entrance, and only the operation time of the first electric accessory means is specified. The time for switching games can be fixed. Thereby, it can contribute to fixation of a series of games of the 1st switching game, the 2nd game, and the 3rd game, and the 3rd game is ended within the interval until the 1st switching game is performed next. It becomes easy.

[Appendix A50]
Route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route;
The game ball that has moved along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) stays at a position where the game ball can enter the third entrance (394) in the third game switching. Retention means (391, 395, 398, 399)
Further comprising
As described in appendix A1, the game ball retained in the retention means (391, 395, 398, 399) enters the third entrance (394) in the third allowable state. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A50, a certain number of game balls are retained in the retention means in the third switching game, and the fixed number of game balls retained in the retention means are switched into the third entry when switched to the third permissible state. Entered into the ball opening. Therefore, the time required for the third switching game can be shortened by setting the time of the third allowable state within a short time within a range in which a certain number of game balls staying in the stay means can enter the third entrance. Can be fixed in time. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. In addition, even if the time required for the third switching game is set to a short time, a certain number of game balls can be made to enter the third entrance by providing the staying means. A player's disadvantage that can be caused by setting the time to a short time, that is, the game balls that can be acquired by the player by reducing the number of game balls entering the third entrance is prevented. it can.

  The staying means is not limited to the means for staying in a state where the game ball is stopped, but includes means for delaying the movement of the game ball by increasing the moving distance or reducing the moving speed, for example.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to appendix A50, wherein the staying means (395, 398) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to stay a game ball.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A51, since the game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means, a certain number of game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means in a short time by the operation of the third electric accessory means. Can enter the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third switching game can be fixed in a shorter time, and it is easier to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed.

[Appendix A52]
The game machine according to appendix A51, wherein the staying means (395, 398) is a delay unit that delays the movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A52, the game ball can be retained in the third electric accessory means with a simple configuration in which a delay unit that delays the movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is provided.

[Appendix A53]
The gaming machine according to appendix A52, wherein the delay unit (395) defines a movement path in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix A54]
The game machine according to appendix A53, wherein the delay unit (398) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A53 and Supplementary Note A54, the game ball is retained in the third electric combination means by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the game ball in the third electric combination means is defined as a meandering path. Can do.

[Appendix A55]
53. The gaming machine according to appendix 52, wherein the delay unit (398) reduces a moving speed of a game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix A56]
The gaming machine according to appendix A55, wherein the delay portion (398) is a concave portion or a convex portion provided in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to appendix A56, wherein the delay portion (398) is a plurality of concave portions or a plurality of convex portions arranged in a dotted manner on the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A55 to Supplementary Note A57, the game ball has a simple configuration in which the moving speed of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is reduced by providing a concave portion or a convex portion in the third electric accessory means. Can be retained in the third electric accessory means.

[Appendix A58]
The gaming machine as set forth in appendix A51, wherein the staying means (398) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a game ball.

[Appendix A59]
The gaming machine according to appendix A58, wherein the staying means (398) is a plurality of grooves arranged side by side in the direction of movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A58 and Supplementary Note A59, the third electric combination is achieved by a simple configuration in which the third electric combination means is held by the third electric combination means by providing a plurality of grooves or the like in the third electric combination means. It can be retained in the physical means.

[Appendix A60]
The third electric accessory means (391) is configured such that the third entrance port is provided in a third opening (353) provided above the third entrance (394) in the route defining means (35). A third restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball to (394) and a third permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the third entrance (394); The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A51 to appendix A59, wherein the game machine is movable between the two.

[Appendix A61]
The third restricted position is a position for closing the third opening (353),
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the third permissible position is a position where the third opening (353) is opened.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A60 and Supplementary Note A61, the movement speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined as the same route by the route definition means, so that the movement speed is made uniform. A certain number of game balls can be retained in the retention means. Thereby, when it is set as the 3rd permissible state, since the game ball retained in the 3rd electric accessory means can be surely entered into the 3rd entrance, a player can play in the 3rd switching game. It can prevent more reliably that the number of game balls which can be acquired decreases.

[Appendix A62]
The third entrance (394) is provided in a third entrance (392) having a third upper opening,
The third electric accessory means (391) is movable in the front-rear direction between the third restriction position that covers the third upper opening and the third allowable position that opens the third upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note A51 to Supplementary Note A61, wherein:

[Appendix A63]
The game ball retained in the third electric accessory means (391) is dropped toward the third upper opening when moving backward from the third restricted position to the third allowable position. The gaming machine according to appendix A62, characterized by:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A62 and Supplementary Note A63, the third electric accessory means is moved from the third restriction position to the third permissible position, so that the game ball moving the third electric accessory means falls and the third electric accessory means falls. A ball is inserted into the third entrance through the upper opening, and as a result, a game ball enters the third entrance. Therefore, it is easy to allow the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means to enter the third entrance, and the third electric accessory means is defined only by defining the operating time of the third electric accessory means. The time for switching games can be fixed. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to fixing the time required for the third game, and it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed.

[Appendix A64]
The staying means (391) includes the third electric accessory means (391) and the third game executing means (41).
The third game executing means (41) is configured to play a game ball by the third electric accessory means (391) until it is switched from the third restricted state to the third allowable state in the third switching game. The gaming machine according to appendix A50, wherein the game machine is switched to a third staying state where the movement is restricted and stayed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A64, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means is retained by being switched to the third retention state in the third switching game, and the third allowable state is changed from the third retention state. By switching to the state, a certain number of staying game balls enter the third entrance. Therefore, by controlling the switching from the third staying state to the third permissible state, the number of game balls entering the third entrance can be controlled and the time required for the third switching game can be fixed. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed while securing the game value given to the player.

[Appendix A65]
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter,
The gaming machine according to appendix A64, wherein the third electric accessory means (391) blocks the movement path in the third restricted state.

[Appendix A66]
The third electric accessory means (391) has a restricting portion (391B) for restricting the movement of the game ball by blocking the movement path in the third restricted state, as described in appendix A65, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A65 and Supplementary Note A66, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the moving path of the game ball is blocked by the third electric accessory means, and then the first switching game is executed. It is possible to finish the third game within the interval until it is played.

[Appendix A67]
The gaming machine according to appendix A50, wherein the staying means (399) holds the game ball in a predetermined area by applying an electromagnetic force or a magnetic force to the game ball.

[Appendix A68]
The game machine according to appendix A67, wherein the staying means (399) holds a certain number of game balls above the third entrance (394).

[Appendix A69]
The gaming machine according to appendix A67, wherein the staying means (399) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a certain number of game balls.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix A67 to appendix A69, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration of holding the game ball using electromagnetic force or magnetic force, and then the first switching game is executed. It is possible to finish the third game within the interval up to.

[Appendix A70]
Any one of Supplementary Notes A50 to A69, wherein the third switching game has a fixed entry allowable time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third acceptable state. Game machines.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A70, the allowed entry time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third allowed state in the third switching game of the third game is fixed. Therefore, since the time required for the third switching game is fixed regardless of the number of game balls entering the third entrance, the time required for the third game including the third switching game is fixed. Becomes easier. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. Accordingly, in the first switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture occurs), or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the three entrances, and to prevent an unnecessary disadvantage from being given to the player.

[Appendix A71]
The third game includes a plurality of the third switching games,
Each of the third switching games has the gaming allowance time fixed, the gaming machine according to appendix A70, wherein

[Appendix A72]
Each of the third switched games is the gaming machine according to appendix A71, wherein the allowed entry time is fixed at the same time.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A71 and Supplementary Note A72, when a plurality of third switching games are executed in the third game, the third switching game is switched to the third permissible state and then switched to the third restricted state. Time is fixed at the same time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, the time required for each third switching game is fixed, and the time required for the third game can be fixed. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed, and can appropriately suppress giving unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A73]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A70 to A72, wherein the allowable time for entering the ball is fixed to be equal to or shorter than a game ball firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds).

[Appendix A74]
The allowable time for entering the ball is fixed to any time within the range of 0.1 to 1 time (for example, 0.06 seconds to 0.6 seconds) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to appendix A73, characterized in that
Firing interval,

[Appendix A75]
The allowable time for entering the ball is fixed to any time within a range of 0.2 to 0.8 times (for example, 0.12 to 0.48 seconds) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to appendix A74, which is characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A73 to Supplementary Note A75, the allowable entry time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third permissible state is less than or equal to the launch interval of the game balls, for example, 0.1 to 1 Hereinafter, it is preferably fixed at any time within the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less of the firing interval. By setting the allowable ball entry time to be equal to or less than the game ball firing interval, the time required for the third switching game is fixed in a very short time, and as a result, a plurality of third switching games are executed in the third game. Even in such a case, the time required for the third game can be fixed in a short time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, it is easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. It is possible to appropriately suppress unnecessary disadvantages.

[Appendix A76]
The second entrance includes a special second entrance (384) and a normal second entrance (385),
A special entry permitting state for allowing a game ball to the special second entrance (385) and a special entrance restriction for restricting a game ball to the special second entrance (385) in the second acceptance state. A switching unit (386) for switching between the states;
Switching unit control means (41) for controlling the operation of the switching unit (386);
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A76, a state where the game ball is allowed to enter the special second entrance is selected and a state where the game ball is allowed to be restricted are selected by switching the switching unit in the second allowable state. Therefore, by controlling the switching of the switching unit in the second allowable state, various games can be given. For example, the probability of entering a game ball into the special second entry port in the second permissible state can be adjusted by the switching pattern of the switching unit (the number of times of switching and the time of the special entrance permissible state). Thereby, a game ball in which the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching a normal game ball in the second game, or a game ball at the special second entrance in the second game. If the ball is not entered, it is possible to provide a game where a jackpot game is not executed and so-called puncture occurs. Since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the pitch probability, the gameability can be adjusted based on the puncture occurrence rate.

  Further, as will be described later, when the third game is executed in the second allowable state, the switching unit can be controlled so that the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted. It is. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent an opportunity to execute the third game during execution of the third game, it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during execution of the third game.

  Further, in the second permissible state, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the special second entrance when a game ball enters the special second entrance. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls that enter the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of entrances to the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Usually, the player can enter the second entrance.

[Appendix A77]
The switching unit control means (41) is configured to switch the switching by the second game execution means (41) when a game ball enters the special second entrance (385) in the second allowable state. The gaming machine according to appendix A76, wherein the gaming machine is controlled to switch from the special entry permission state to the special entry restriction state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A77, the entry of a game ball into the special second entrance is restricted when the game ball enters the special second entrance. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls that enter the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of entrances to the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Usually, the player can enter the second entrance.

[Appendix A78]
The game according to appendix A76 or appendix A77, wherein the third specific condition is that a game ball is inserted into the special second entrance when the third game is not being executed. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A78, when the third game is executed in the second allowable state, the switching unit may be controlled to a state where the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted. Is possible. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent an opportunity to execute the third game during execution of the third game, it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during execution of the third game.

[Appendix A79]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A76 to appendix A78, wherein the second predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed since switching to the second allowable state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A79, when the predetermined time has elapsed since switching to the second allowable state, the gaming machine is switched to the second restricted state. Therefore, depending on the setting of the predetermined time, it is possible to adjust the probability of the game ball entering the special second entrance in the second allowable state. Thereby, a game ball in which the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching a normal game ball in the second game, or a game ball at the special second entrance in the second game. If the ball is not entered, it is possible to provide a game where a jackpot game is not executed and so-called puncture occurs. Since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the pitch probability, the gameability can be adjusted based on the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix A80]
The gaming machine according to appendix A79, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time equal to or longer than a game ball firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds).

[Appendix A81]
The gaming machine according to appendix A80, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 1 to 30 times (for example, 0.6 seconds to 18 seconds) of the firing interval.

[Appendix A82]
The gaming machine according to appendix A80, wherein the predetermined time is set to be not less than 2 times and not more than 20 times (for example, not less than 1.2 seconds and not more than 12 seconds) of the firing interval.

[Appendix A83]
The gaming machine according to appendix A80, wherein the predetermined time is set to be not less than 3 times and not more than 10 times (for example, not less than 1.8 seconds and not more than 6 seconds) of the firing interval.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A80 to Supplementary Note A83, the predetermined time from when switched to the second permissible state to when switched to the second restricted state is greater than or equal to the launch interval of the game balls, for example, greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 30 times the launch interval Preferably, it is set to be not less than 2 times and not more than 20 times the firing interval, and more preferably not less than 3 times and not more than 10 times the firing interval. As a result, a normal game ball is launched in the second game, so that the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance, and a game is provided in which puncture does not occur as long as normal launch is performed.

[Appendix A84]
Any of Supplementary Notes A76 to A78, wherein the probability of entering the special second entrance (384) in the second allowable state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability. Game machines.

[Appendix A85]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A84, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 1% or more and 95% or less.

[Appendix A86]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A84, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 20% or more and 90% or less.

[Appendix A87]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A84, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 50% or more and 80% or less.

  In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A84 to A87, the probability of entering the special second entrance in the second allowable state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability, for example, 1% to 95%. Is set, preferably 20% or more and 90% or less, more preferably 50% or more and 80% or less. Thereby, in the second game, a game property in which a so-called puncture is generated in which the third game is not executed because the game ball is not entered in the special second entrance can be provided. Since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the pitch probability, the gameability can be adjusted based on the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix B1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
A first game in which the first switching game that is switched to the first restricted state from the first restricted state and switched to the first restricted state when the first predetermined condition is satisfied is executed one or more times (game per game) ) Is executed by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, and the first game executing means (41)
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the first restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
Route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route;
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. .

  By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is one that can acquire a large amount of game balls by putting the game balls into a variable winning opening that is opened in a jackpot game advantageous to the player. In this type of game, it is generally possible to enter a game ball through a plurality of routes with respect to a variable winning opening. However, when a game ball can enter the variable winning opening through a plurality of routes, the time from when the game ball is launched until the gaming ball enters the variable winning opening becomes uneven. The time required for the jackpot game is uneven. In addition, when a game ball can enter the variable prize opening through a plurality of routes, the game ball moving along a route different from the plurality of paths that can win a prize becomes a useless ball that does not enter the variable prize opening. The occurrence of the useless balls not only causes the time required for the jackpot game to be non-uniform, but also reduces the number of difference balls in the jackpot game, resulting in a disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, since the game ball launched into the predetermined area is moved along the same route by the route defining means, the game ball is moved to the predetermined area of the game board with a constant strength (stroke). In the case of launching, the moving speeds of the game balls moving along the moving path defined by the path defining means are made uniform among the game balls, and along the moving path defined by the path defining means at a uniform interval. Moving. And since the 3rd entrance is provided in the position which can enter a game ball which moves along a movement course specified by a course definition means, when a game ball is launched to a predetermined field, the 3rd game In the third switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the third entrance is made uniform between the game balls and the occurrence of useless balls is prevented. Therefore, for example, as a condition for ending the third switching game of the third game, for example, a predetermined time elapses after the third permitted state is set, or a game ball with a number greater than or equal to the upper limit is entered at the third entrance. If the game ball is moved along the same route by the route defining means, the time required for the third switching game is uniform because the game ball is uniformly inserted into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. As a result, when the first game is executed, the time required for the game cycle of the first game, the second game, and the third game is equalized, so the third game is terminated in the interval between the first switching games. It becomes easy to make. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the first switching game from being started in the first game while the interval of the first switching game is ended during the execution of the third game and the third game is being executed. For this reason, in the game per hit, the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed due to the fact that the game hit ball 99 is executed even though the game ball 99 enters the electric winning prize opening 376, V Occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot game is not executed due to invalidation of a prize at the V prize opening 384 due to the fact that a jackpot game is being executed despite the game ball 99 having entered the prize opening 384, In the role opening / closing game, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the variable winning port 394 due to the opening of the electric winning port 376.

  Further, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the third entrance, so that it is defined by the route defining means while being in the third allowable state. All of the game balls that have moved along the moving route and have reached a position where they can enter the third entrance can be entered into the third entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may occur when a configuration in which a game ball can enter the third entrance through a plurality of routes, that is, a waste ball that does not enter the third entrance, can be prevented. . Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by the useless ball which is not entered into the 3rd entrance, for example, reduction of the number of difference balls, can be suppressed.

[Appendix B2]
The third entrance (394) is provided below the third electric accessory means (391),
The third electric accessory means (391) includes a third opening (353) provided above the third entrance (394) in the route defining means (35). 353) is closed, and the third restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394) and the third opening (353) are opened. The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the gaming machine is movable between a third permissible position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the third entrance (394).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, the third electric accessory means is moved to open or close the third opening provided in the path defining means, thereby restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the third entrance. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the third restricted state and the third permissible state with a simple configuration in which a third opening is provided in the route defining means and the third opening is opened and closed by the third electric accessory means. The time required for the third game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above disadvantages can be prevented from being given to the player.

[Appendix B3]
The second entrance (384) is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. Or the gaming machine described in Appendix B2.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3, the second entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, so that the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the game ball entering the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as an end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, a predetermined time elapses after the second permitted state is reached, and the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number at the second entrance When it is set to enter the ball, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. Thereby, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval of the first switching game is ended during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is being executed. In addition, since the execution of the first switching game in the first game can be easily prevented, it is possible to suppress the above-described disadvantages from being given to the player.

  Furthermore, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while being in the second allowable state. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving route and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can enter the second entrance, enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the useless balls. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement route defined by the route defining means and have reached a position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a game ball is not entered at the second entrance (so-called puncture). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix B4]
The second entrance (384) is provided below the second electric accessory means (381),
In the second opening (352) provided above the second entrance (384) in the route defining means (35), the second electric accessory means (381) is provided in the second entrance port. The second restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the (384) and the second permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the second entrance (384). The gaming machine according to appendix B3, which is movable between

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the second electric accessory means is moved to open or close the second opening provided in the route defining means, thereby restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the second entrance. Is done. Therefore, the second restricting state and the second permissible state can be switched by a simple configuration in which a second opening is provided in the route defining means and the second opening is opened and closed by the second electric accessory means. The time required for the second game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above disadvantages can be prevented from being given to the player.

[Appendix B5]
Note that the first entrance (376) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. To Attached B4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball is not entered at the first entrance in the first switching game of the first game (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture, and consequently the third specific condition is not satisfied. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix B6]
The first entrance (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371),
In the first opening (351) provided above the first entrance (376) in the route defining means (35), the first electric accessory means (371) The first restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the (376) and the first permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the first entrance (376). The gaming machine according to appendix B5, which is movable between

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B6, the first electric accessory means is moved to open or close the first opening provided in the route defining means, thereby restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the first entrance. Is done. For this reason, the first restriction state and the first permissible state can be switched by a simple configuration in which the path defining means is provided with the first opening and the first opening is opened and closed by the first electric accessory means. The time required for the first game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above disadvantages can be prevented from being given to the player.

[Appendix B7]
The first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384) are provided at positions where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. And
Game balls that move along the movement path can be preferentially entered in the order of the first entrance (376), the second entrance (384), and the third entrance (394). The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position to be taken.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B7, if two or more of the first electric accessory means, the second electric accessory means, and the third electric accessory means are operated in duplicate, the first entrance port, Game balls can be entered in the priority order of the second entrance and the third entrance. Therefore, when the first game is executed due to the establishment of the first specific condition, the establishment of the second specific condition has the highest priority, and then the establishment of the third specific condition has priority. That is, the winning priority order of the game balls at the first entrance, the second entrance, and the third entrance is set with the highest priority on the execution of the third game. Thereby, the player can obtain the maximum benefit obtained by executing the third game.

[Appendix C1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time elapses after switching to the third permissible state, and that an upper limit number of game balls are entered in the third entrance (394) in the third permissible state. That one of the conditions is met,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined time is set to be equal to or shorter than a minimum time required to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance (394).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the third restricted game is switched from the third restricted state to the third allowed state, a predetermined time until the third restricted state is switched, that is, the game ball to the third entrance is The maximum allowable time for entering the ball is set to be equal to or shorter than the minimum time required for the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance. That is, before the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the third entrance, the third restricted state is established by the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time). Therefore, the upper limit number of game balls can be prevented from being changed from the third allowed state to the third restricted state before the predetermined time (maximum allowed entry time) has elapsed by entering the third entrance. Thereby, the execution time of the third switching game can be made uniform, and further, the execution time of the third game can be made uniform, so that it is easy to end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the first switching game interval from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. In one switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture), or when the first switching game is executed, the third entry It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the mouth.

[Appendix C2]
The predetermined time is set to be equal to or shorter than a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the upper limit number (for example, 10). Gaming machine.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 0.5 times or more and 1 time or less of a time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game balls by the upper limit number.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C3, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less of a time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game balls by the upper limit number.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix C2 to appendix C4, the predetermined time is equal to or less than a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit number, for example, 0.5 times or more of a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit number. It is set to 1 times or less, preferably 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less. Therefore, the third switching game is terminated when the predetermined time elapses, while preventing the number of game balls entering the third entrance from being reduced significantly with respect to the upper limit number within the predetermined time. Can be made. Accordingly, the first switching game can be more surely ensured by ensuring a sufficient profit given to the player in the third game and uniformizing the time required for the third switching game and thus the time required for the third game. The third game can be ended at intervals.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C4, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or longer than a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is determined to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of third switching games as the third game, the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. In addition, the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Accordingly, for example, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. . As a result, in the first switching game, the situation where the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture) or the first switching game is executed. Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance is prevented, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C5, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or greater than a sum of a theoretical maximum time of the second gaming state and a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C6, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Instead, the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even when the second game is executed before the third game is executed, the third game can be ended at an interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably giving an unnecessary disadvantage to a player.

[Appendix D1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time elapses after switching to the third permissible state, and that an upper limit number of game balls are entered in the third entrance (394) in the third permissible state. That one of the conditions is met,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding a minimum time required to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance (394).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when the third switching game is switched from the third restricted state to the third allowable state, a predetermined time until switching to the third restricted state, that is, the game ball to the third entrance is The maximum allowable time for entering a ball that is allowed to enter is set to a time that exceeds the minimum time required to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entrance. As a result, there is a possibility that the upper limit number of game balls enter the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum entrance allowable time) elapses, thereby switching from the third allowable state to the third restricted state. Get higher. When the upper limit number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum entry allowance time) elapses, the third allowance state is switched to the third restriction state. Since the time required for the switching game is shorter than the case where the predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time) has elapsed and the third restricted state is set, the time required for the third game can also be shortened. Therefore, by shortening the time required for the third game, it is possible to easily end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Accordingly, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game, it is possible to easily execute the third game a plurality of times.

  In addition, by ending the third game in the interval between the first switching games, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game, and the first game in the first game during the execution of the third game. It is possible to prevent the execution of the 1-switching game from being started. As a result, in the first switching game, the situation where the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture) or the first switching game is executed. Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance is prevented, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

  Further, when the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum entry allowance time) elapses, the third restricted game has a third state. The number of game balls that enter the entrance is increased as compared to the case where the third restriction state is reached due to the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time). Therefore, when the privilege given to the player in the third switching game is payout of the game ball with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the third entrance, the player can play the maximum number of game balls in the third switching game. The number of game balls that can be acquired and can be acquired in the third game increases. This suppresses a player's disadvantage that can occur when the third allowable state is switched to the third restricted state due to the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum entry allowable time), that is, a decrease in benefits (game balls) that can be acquired. And it can prevent that the interest of a game falls.

[Appendix D2]
In the supplementary note D1, the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the upper limit number (for example, 10). The gaming machine described.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the predetermined time is set to be more than 1 time and not more than 1.5 times the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval by the upper limit number.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less of a time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit number.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix D2 to appendix D4, the predetermined time exceeds the time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit, for example, more than 1 time the time obtained by multiplying the launch interval of game balls by the upper limit. It is set to 5 times or less, preferably 1.1 times to 1.3 times. Therefore, when switching from the third allowable state to the third restricted state by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the third entrance, the time until switching from the third allowable state to the third restricted state However, it is prevented from becoming significantly shorter than the predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the third game from being significantly shortened. Therefore, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times in the first game, the first switching game is next performed after the third game is completed. It is possible to shorten the blank period that occurs before the start of.

  By the way, when the blank period becomes longer, it is assumed that the player makes a stop to stop the launch of the game ball in order to prevent the decrease of the possessed game ball due to the launch of the game ball. If a stop-attack is made during the blank period until the first switching game is started, the launch of the game ball is delayed with respect to the start of the first switch game, or the game ball does not arrive in a predetermined area due to the occurrence of a launch failure. Due to the occurrence of a situation or the like, a game ball may not enter the first entrance in the first switching game, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the third game that can give a privilege to the player is not executed. On the other hand, since the blank period can be shortened, stoppage in the blank period can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not entered at the first entrance in the first switching game due to a delay in launching the game ball, and thus it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D4, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or longer than a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D5, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is determined to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of third switching games as the third game, the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. In addition, the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Accordingly, for example, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. . As a result, in the first switching game, the situation where the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture) or the first switching game is executed. Occurrence of a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance is prevented, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine according to appendix D5, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or greater than a sum of a theoretical maximum time of the second gaming state and a theoretical maximum time of the third game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Instead, the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even when the second game is executed before the third game is executed, the third game can be ended at an interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably giving an unnecessary disadvantage to a player.

[Appendix E1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
Route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route;
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter,
The gaming machine, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially the same as or less than the interval.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E1, since the game balls launched into the predetermined area are moved along the same route defined by the route defining means, the movement of the game balls moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means The speed is equalized between the game balls. And since the 3rd entrance is provided in the position which can enter a game ball which moves along a movement course specified by a course definition means, when a game ball is launched to a predetermined field, the 3rd game In the third switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the third entrance is equalized between the game balls. For this reason, as a condition for ending the third switching game of the third game (third predetermined condition), for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the third permitted state was established, and more than the upper limit number of game balls have entered the third entrance. When it is set to be balled, the time required for the third switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. In particular, when it is determined that the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game is executed as the third game because the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially equal to or less than the interval, for example, Even if the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required, the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the first switching game interval from ending during execution of the third game and starting the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. In one switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture), or when the first switching game is executed, the third entry It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the mouth.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is not less than 0.8 times and not more than 0.99 times the interval.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is not less than 0.85 times and not more than 0.95 times the interval.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E2 and Supplementary Note E3, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 0.99 times or less shorter than the interval, preferably 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less. Thus, there is a high possibility that the third game can be ended in the interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably that a disadvantage is given to a player.

[Appendix E4]
The game according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E3, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 1 time or less of a time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval. Machine.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to appendix E4, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less of a time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix E4 and appendix E5, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is shorter than the remaining time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval, and is 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times the remaining time. It is set to the following, preferably 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less. Therefore, not only the third game but also the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, even when the second game is executed before the third game is executed, the third game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Thereby, it can suppress more reliably giving an unnecessary disadvantage to a player.

[Appendix E6]
The second entry port (384) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can be entered. To Addendum E5.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, since the second entrance is provided at a position where the game ball that moves along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the game ball entering the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as an end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, when a predetermined time elapses after the second allowed state is set, or more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the second entrance. When it is set to be balled, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. Thereby, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval of the first switching game is ended during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is being executed. In addition, since the execution of the first switching game in the first game can be easily prevented, it is possible to suppress the above-described disadvantages from being given to the player.

  Furthermore, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while being in the second allowable state. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving route and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can enter the second entrance, enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the useless balls. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement route defined by the route defining means and have reached a position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a game ball is not entered at the second entrance (so-called puncture). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix E7]
Note that the first entrance (376) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the moving path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. To Addendum E5.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter, the game ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball enters the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball is not entered at the first entrance in the first switching game of the first game (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of puncture, and consequently the third specific condition is not satisfied. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring unless a privilege that can be originally acquired by the player can be acquired by executing the third game.

[Appendix F1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
First game determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the determination condition (lottery per common figure);
A determination result display means (361) for displaying a determination result by the first game determination means (41);
Display control means (41) for controlling display contents on the determination result display means;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
When it is determined that the first game is to be executed, the first game determination means (41) determines the number of execution times (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game. ,
The display control means (41) is determined by the first game determination means (41) when the first game determination means (41) determines that the first game is to be executed. A game machine, wherein the determination result display means (361) displays contents reflecting the number of times the game has been executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, when the number of times of execution of the first switching game is a plurality of times, the first specific game is executed as long as the second specific condition and the third specific condition are satisfied according to the number of execution times of the first switching game. The switching game, the second game, and the third game are repeatedly executed. That is, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times due to the establishment of the first specific condition, a third game in which the player can acquire a privilege is executed according to the number of executions of the first switching game. There is provided a gaming machine having excellent gaming properties. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play. Then, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is determined by the first game determination unit, and the determination result by the first game determination unit including the number of executions is displayed on the determination result display unit. Therefore, the player can grasp the determination result by the first game determination means by the determination result display means, and when the determination result is to execute the first game, the player can determine the number of times of execution of the first switching game in the first game. I can grasp. And since the frequency | count of the 1st switching game in a 1st game can be grasped | ascertained, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the maximum frequency | count of the 3rd game in which a privilege can be acquired. This adds to the new gameability the gameability that can grasp the maximum number of executions of the third game for which benefits can be obtained, thereby increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game and increasing the player's game motivation. It becomes possible to improve further. Furthermore, for example, it is possible to predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game will be executed after the end of the third game, so that the degree of interest and interest in the game is improved, and the first game of the first game after the end of the third game When a 1-switch game is executed, it can be predicted that a game ball needs to enter the first entrance, so the third game is executed when no game ball enters the first entrance. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of not being done.

[Appendix F2]
The display control means (41) causes the determination result display means (361) to display a number that matches the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2, since the number matched with the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination unit is displayed on the determination result display unit, the player can execute the number of times of execution of the first switching game. Can be grasped directly and easily. Thereby, for example, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, thereby improving the degree of interest and interest in the game, and the first game after the end of the third game. When the first switching game of the game is executed, it can be easily predicted that it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first entrance, so that the game ball is not entered into the first entrance. The disadvantage that the third game is not executed is more reliably prevented.

[Appendix F3]
A symbol display means (341) on which the decorative symbol indicating the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variably displayed;
A symbol display control means (51) for controlling display contents on the symbol display means (341);
Further comprising
The symbol display control means (51)
Display the determination result by the first game determination means (41),
Contents reflecting the number of times of execution of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) when the first game determination means (41) determines that the first game is to be executed. Is displayed on the symbol display means (341), the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is displayed on the symbol display means on which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in addition to the determination result display means. Therefore, the player can grasp the determination result by the first game determination means by the symbol display means, and can enjoy the game while paying attention to the symbol display means. Further, in a gaming machine including both the determination result display means and the symbol display means, the symbol display means is usually arranged more easily than the determination result display means. Therefore, the player can easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game will be executed after the end of the third game, for example, as compared with the case where attention is paid to the determination result display means. When the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the game, it can be easily predicted that it is necessary to make the game ball enter the first entrance. Accordingly, it is possible to more easily prevent the disadvantage that the third game is not executed because the game ball is not entered into the first entrance.

[Appendix F4]
The symbol display control means (51) causes the decorative symbol to be displayed on the effective line set in the symbol display means (341), with the number matched with the number of executions of the first switching game as a flat eye. The gaming machine according to appendix F3, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F4, since the number corresponding to the number of times of execution of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means is displayed as a doublet, the decorative symbol is displayed on the symbol display means. The number of executions of the switching game can be grasped more directly and easily. Accordingly, when the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, it can be more easily predicted that the game ball needs to enter the first entrance, so the first Occurrence of the disadvantage that the third game is not executed due to the game ball not entering the entrance is further reliably prevented.

[Appendix F5]
When the symbol display control means (51) displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display control means (51) in a variable manner, the determination result in the first game determination means (41) in the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3 or Supplementary Note F4, wherein a game effect that suggests or clearly indicates is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F5, in the symbol display means in which the determination result in the first game determination means is displayed as a decoration symbol, the determination result in the first game determination means is suggested or indicated during the decorative symbol variation display. A game production is executed. Thereby, the player can predict and enjoy the possibility that the determination result causes the first game to be executed while paying attention to the game effect until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix F1 to appendix F5, wherein the selection rate is set to be lower for the first game with a higher number of executions of the first switching game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the selection rate is set lower for the first switching game with the larger number of executions of the first switching game. On the other hand, the greater the number of executions of the first switching game, the greater the number of times the third game is executed during the execution of the first game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to obtain a determination result with a large number of executions of the first switching game.

[Appendix G1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
With
The first electric accessory means (371) has a delay part (373) for delaying the movement of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371),
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, A gaming machine, wherein the third game is executed in an interval between the first switching games.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1, a delay unit is provided in the first electric accessory means for restricting or allowing the game ball to enter the first entrance. Therefore, when the game ball moves through the first electric combination means, the delay time can ensure a long residence time of the game ball in the first electric combination means. Thereby, possibility that a game ball will enter into the 1st starting opening can be raised. As a result, the possibility of the second game being executed is increased by increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the first entrance is established, and further, The possibility that the third specific condition that is established when the game ball enters the second entrance is satisfied is increased, and the third game in which a privilege can be given to the player may be executed. Is increased. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the third game in which a privilege can be given to the player. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, wherein the residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is equal to or longer than a launch interval of the game balls.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2, wherein the residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is 1 to 5 times the firing interval of the game ball.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, wherein a residence time of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is not less than 1 and not more than 3 times a launch interval of the game balls.

  In the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes G2 to G4, the residence time of the game balls in the first electric accessory means is longer than the launch interval of the game balls, for example, 1 to 5 times the launch interval of the game balls, preferably the game ball 1 to 3 times the firing interval. Therefore, when game balls are continuously launched toward the first electric accessory means, a state where at least one game ball stays on the first electric accessory means is maintained. As a result, when the first electric accessory means is operated in the first switching game, the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means can be made to enter the first entrance. The possibility that the second game is executed is further increased by further increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the first entrance is established, and as a result, The possibility that the third specific condition that is established when the game ball enters the second entrance will be further increased, so that the third game in which a privilege can be given to the player may be executed. Is further enhanced. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, the possibility of executing the third game that can give a privilege to the player can be further increased. Providing profits can be further suppressed.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix G1 to appendix G4, wherein the delay unit moves the game ball along a meandering path in the first electric accessory means (371).

[Appendix G6]
The game machine according to appendix G5, wherein the delay unit (373) includes a guide unit that changes a moving direction of the game ball in a forward direction or a backward direction.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G5 and Supplementary Note G6, the movement of the game ball in the first electric accessory means is delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration, and the time for the game ball to stay in the first electric accessory means is lengthened. can do. For example, when the first electric combination means is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the first electric combination means by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix G7]
Further comprising route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route,
The first entry opening (376) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the moving route defined by the route defining means (35) can be entered. To Attached G6.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G7, the moving path of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined as the same path by the path defining means, so that the moving speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is made uniform. This makes it possible for the game ball to be present at a position where it can enter the first entrance at an interval substantially corresponding to the launch interval of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball does not enter the first entrance. As a result, the occurrence of the situation that the second specific condition or the third specific condition is not satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied is suppressed, and thus the occurrence of the situation where the profit obtained by the execution of the third game cannot be enjoyed is suppressed. it can.

[Appendix G8]
The first entrance (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371),
The gaming machine according to appendix G7, wherein the first electric accessory means (371) is provided in the route defining means (35).

[Appendix G9]
In the first opening (351) provided above the first entrance (376) in the route defining means (35), the first electric accessory means (371) A first restriction position (standby position) for restricting entry of game balls into (376), and a first allowance position (operation position) for allowing entry of game balls into the first entrance (376). The gaming machine according to appendix G8, wherein the gaming machine is movable between the two.

[Appendix G10]
The first restricted position is a position for closing the first opening (351),
The gaming machine according to appendix G9, wherein the first allowable position is a position where the first opening (351) is opened.

  In the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes G8 to G10, the movement speed of the game balls launched into the predetermined area is defined as the same route by the route defining means, so that the movement speed is made uniform. It is possible to always retain a certain number of game balls. Thereby, when it is set as the 1st permissible state, since the game ball retained in the 1st electric accessory means can be surely entered into the 1st entrance, after the 1st specific condition is established, The occurrence of the situation where the 2 specific condition and the third specific condition are not satisfied can be more reliably suppressed, and as a result, the occurrence of the situation where the profit obtained by the execution of the third game cannot be enjoyed can be more reliably suppressed.

[Appendix G11]
The first entrance (376) is provided in a first entrance (372) having a first upper opening,
The first electric accessory means (371) is movable in the front-rear direction between the first restriction position covering the first upper opening and the first allowable position opening the first upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G10, wherein:

[Appendix G12]
The game ball retained in the first electric accessory means (371) is dropped toward the first upper opening when moving backward from the first restriction position to the first permissible position. The gaming machine according to appendix G11, characterized by:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G11 and Supplementary Note G12, the first electric accessory means is moved from the first restriction position to the first permissible position, whereby the game ball moving the first electric accessory means falls and the first A ball is inserted into the first entrance through the upper opening, and as a result, a game ball enters the first entrance. For this reason, it becomes easy to allow the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means to enter the first entrance, and only the operation time of the first electric accessory means is specified. The time for switching games can be fixed. Thereby, it can contribute to fixation of a series of games of the 1st switching game, the 2nd game, and the 3rd game, and the 3rd game is ended within the interval until the 1st switching game is performed next. It becomes easy.

[Appendix H1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
Route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route;
Retaining means (391, 395, 398, 399) for retaining the game ball that has moved along the movement route at a position where the game ball can enter the third entrance (394) in the third game switching. )When,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
A gaming machine characterized in that the game balls retained in the staying means (391, 395, 398, 399) enter the third entrance (394) in the third permissible state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H1, a certain number of game balls are retained in the retention means in the third switching game, and when the game machine is switched to the third permissible state, a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means is third Entered into the ball opening. Therefore, the time required for the third switching game can be shortened by setting the time of the third allowable state within a short time within a range in which a certain number of game balls staying in the stay means can enter the third entrance. Can be fixed in time. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. In addition, even if the time required for the third switching game is set to a short time, a certain number of game balls can be made to enter the third entrance by providing the staying means. A player's disadvantage that can be caused by setting the time to a short time, that is, the game balls that can be acquired by the player by reducing the number of game balls entering the third entrance is prevented. it can.

  The staying means is not limited to the means for staying in a state where the game ball is stopped, but includes means for delaying the movement of the game ball by increasing the moving distance or reducing the moving speed, for example.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine as set forth in appendix H1, wherein the staying means (395, 398) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to stay in a game ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H2, since the game balls are retained in the third electric combination means, a certain number of game balls are retained in the third electric combination means in a short time by the operation of the third electric combination means. Can enter the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third switching game can be fixed in a shorter time, and it is easier to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the staying means (395, 398) is a delay unit that delays the movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H3, the game ball can be retained in the third electric accessory means with a simple configuration in which a delay unit that delays the movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is provided.

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine according to appendix H3, wherein the delay unit (395) defines a movement path in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H5]
The game machine according to appendix H4, wherein the delay unit (398) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H4 and Supplementary Note H5, the game ball is retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is defined as a meandering route. Can do.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to appendix H3, wherein the delay unit (398) reduces a moving speed of a game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H7]
The game machine according to appendix H6, wherein the delay portion (398) is a concave portion or a convex portion provided in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H8]
The game machine according to appendix H7, wherein the delay unit (398) is a plurality of concave portions or a plurality of convex portions arranged in a dotted pattern on the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to appendix H6 to appendix H8, the game ball has a simple configuration in which the moving speed of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is reduced by providing a concave portion or a convex portion in the third electric accessory means. Can be retained in the third electric accessory means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the staying means (398) is a means for holding the game ball by the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H10]
The gaming machine according to appendix H9, wherein the staying means (398) is a plurality of grooves arranged side by side in the moving direction of the game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H9 and Supplementary Note H10, the third electric combination is achieved by a simple configuration in which the third electric combination means is held by the third electric combination means by providing a plurality of grooves or the like in the third electric combination means. It can be retained in the physical means.

[Appendix H11]
The third electric accessory means (391) is configured such that the third entrance port is provided in a third opening (353) provided above the third entrance (394) in the route defining means (35). A third restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball to (394) and a third permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the third entrance (394); The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H2 to Supplementary Note H10, wherein the game machine is capable of moving between.

[Appendix H12]
The third restricted position is a position for closing the third opening (353),
The gaming machine according to appendix H11, wherein the third allowable position is a position at which the third opening (353) is opened.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H11 and Supplementary Note H12, the movement speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined as the same route by the route definition means, so that the movement speed is made uniform. A certain number of game balls can be retained in the retention means. Thereby, when it is set as the 3rd permissible state, since the game ball retained in the 3rd electric accessory means can be surely entered into the 3rd entrance, a player can play in the 3rd switching game. It can prevent more reliably that the number of game balls which can be acquired decreases.

[Appendix H13]
The third entrance (394) is provided in a third entrance (392) having a third upper opening,
The third electric accessory means (391) is movable in the front-rear direction between the third restriction position that covers the third upper opening and the third allowable position that opens the third upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H2 to Supplementary Note H12, wherein:

[Appendix H14]
The game ball retained in the third electric accessory means (391) is dropped toward the third upper opening when moving backward from the third restricted position to the third allowable position. The gaming machine according to appendix H13, characterized by:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H13 and Supplementary Note H14, the third electric accessory means is moved from the third restricted position to the third permissible position, whereby the game ball moving the third electric accessory means falls and the third A ball is inserted into the third entrance through the upper opening, and as a result, a game ball enters the third entrance. Therefore, it is easy to allow the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means to enter the third entrance, and the third electric accessory means is defined only by defining the operating time of the third electric accessory means. The time for switching games can be fixed. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to fixing the time required for the third game, and it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed.

[Appendix H15]
The staying means (391) includes the third electric accessory means (391) and the third game executing means (41).
The third game executing means (41) is configured to play a game ball by the third electric accessory means (391) until it is switched from the third restricted state to the third allowable state in the third switching game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, wherein the gaming machine is switched to a third staying state in which movement is restricted and retained.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H15, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means is retained by being switched to the third retention state in the third switching game, and the third allowable state from the third retention state is retained. By switching to the state, a certain number of staying game balls enter the third entrance. Therefore, by controlling the switching from the third staying state to the third permissible state, the number of game balls entering the third entrance can be controlled and the time required for the third switching game can be fixed. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed while securing the game value given to the player.

[Appendix H16]
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter,
The gaming machine according to appendix H15, wherein the third electric accessory means (391) blocks the movement path in the third restricted state.

[Appendix H17]
The third electric accessory means (391) includes a restricting portion (391B) that restricts the movement of the game ball by blocking the movement path in the third restricted state, as described in appendix H16, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H16 and Supplementary Note H17, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the moving path of the game ball is blocked by the third electric accessory means, and then the first switching game is executed. It is possible to finish the third game within the interval until it is played.

[Appendix H18]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the staying means (399) holds the game ball in a predetermined area by applying an electromagnetic force or a magnetic force to the game ball.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine according to appendix H18, wherein the staying means (399) holds a certain number of game balls above the third entrance (394).

[Appendix H20]
The gaming machine according to appendix H18, wherein the staying means (399) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a certain number of game balls.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix H18 to appendix H20, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration of holding the game ball using electromagnetic force or magnetic force, and then the first switching game is executed. It is possible to finish the third game within the interval up to.

[Appendix I1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance (384) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the second entrance (384). 391) third game execution means (41) executed by controlling,
Route defining means (35) for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route;
Retaining means (391, 395, 398, 399) for retaining the game ball that has moved along the movement route at a position where the game ball can enter the third entrance (394) in the third game switching. )When,
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, Executing the third game in an interval between the first switching games;
The game balls retained in the staying means (391, 395, 398, 399) enter the third entrance (394) in the third allowable state,
The gaming machine, wherein the third switching game has a fixed allowed entry time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third allowed state.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I1, the allowed entry time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third allowed state in the third switching game of the third game is fixed. Therefore, since the time required for the third switching game is fixed regardless of the number of game balls entering the third entrance, the time required for the third game including the third switching game is fixed. Becomes easier. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and starting the execution of the first switching game in the first game during the execution of the third game. Accordingly, in the first switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entrance (so-called puncture occurs), or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball cannot be entered into the three entrances, and to prevent an unnecessary disadvantage from being given to the player.

[Appendix I2]
The third game includes a plurality of the third switching games,
Each of the third switching games is the gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the allowed entry time is fixed.

[Appendix I3]
Each of the third switching games has the allowed entry time fixed at the same time, and the gaming machine according to appendix I2, wherein

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note I2 and Supplementary Note I3, when a plurality of third switching games are executed in the third game, the third switching game is switched to the third permissible state and then switched to the third restricted state. Time is fixed at the same time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, the time required for each third switching game is fixed, and the time required for the third game can be fixed. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed, and can appropriately suppress giving unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I1 to appendix I3, wherein the allowed ball entry time is fixed to a game ball firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) or less.

[Appendix I5]
The allowable time for entering the ball is fixed to any time within the range of 0.1 to 1 time (for example, 0.06 seconds to 0.6 seconds) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to appendix I4, characterized in that

[Appendix I6]
The allowable time for entering the ball is fixed to any time within a range of 0.2 to 0.8 times (for example, 0.12 to 0.48 seconds) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to appendix I5, which is characterized in that

  In the gaming machines according to appendix I4 to appendix I6, the allowed entry time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third allowed state is less than or equal to the launch interval of the game ball, for example, 0.1 to 1 times the launch interval Hereinafter, it is preferably fixed at any time within the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less of the firing interval. By setting the allowable ball entry time to be equal to or less than the game ball firing interval, the time required for the third switching game is fixed in a very short time, and as a result, a plurality of third switching games are executed in the third game. Even in such a case, the time required for the third game can be fixed in a short time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, it is easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. It is possible to appropriately suppress unnecessary disadvantages.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I1 to appendix I6, wherein the staying means (395, 398) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to retain a game ball.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I7, since the game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means, a certain number of game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means in a short time by the operation of the third electric accessory means. Can enter the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third switching game can be fixed in a shorter time, and it is easier to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed.

[Appendix I8]
The gaming machine according to appendix I7, wherein the staying means (395, 398) is a delay unit that delays the movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I8, the game ball can be retained in the third electric accessory means with a simple configuration in which a delay unit that delays the movement of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is provided.

[Appendix I9]
The gaming machine according to appendix I8, wherein the delay unit (395) defines a movement route in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to appendix I9, wherein the delay unit (398) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note I9 and Supplementary Note I10, the game ball is retained in the third electric combination means by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the game ball in the third electric combination means is defined as a meandering path. Can do.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to appendix I8, wherein the delay unit (398) reduces a moving speed of a game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix I12]
The game machine according to Supplementary Note I11, wherein the delay portion (398) is a concave portion or a convex portion provided in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix I13]
The gaming machine according to appendix I12, wherein the delay unit (398) is a plurality of concave portions or a plurality of convex portions arranged in a dotted pattern on the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to appendix I11 to appendix I13, the game ball has a simple configuration in which the moving speed of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is reduced by providing a concave portion or a convex portion in the third electric accessory means. Can be retained in the third electric accessory means.

[Appendix I14]
The gaming machine as set forth in appendix I7, characterized in that the staying means (398) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a game ball.

[Appendix I15]
The gaming machine according to appendix I14, wherein the staying means (398) is a plurality of grooves arranged side by side in the moving direction of the game ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note I14 and Supplementary Note I15, the third electric combination is achieved by a simple configuration in which the third electric combination means is held by the third electric combination means by providing a plurality of grooves or the like in the third electric combination means. It can be retained in the physical means.

[Appendix I16]
The third electric accessory means (391) is configured such that the third entrance port is provided in a third opening (353) provided above the third entrance (394) in the route defining means (35). A third restriction position (standby position) for restricting the entry of the game ball to (394) and a third permissible position (operation position) for allowing the game ball to enter the third entrance (394); The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I1 to appendix I15, wherein the game machine is movable between the two.

[Appendix I17]
The third restricted position is a position for closing the third opening (353),
The gaming machine according to appendix I16, wherein the third permissible position is a position at which the third opening (353) is opened.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note I16 and Supplementary Note I17, the moving speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is regulated to the same path by the path defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform. A certain number of game balls can be retained in the retention means. Thereby, when it is set as the 3rd permissible state, since the game ball retained in the 3rd electric accessory means can be surely entered into the 3rd entrance, a player can play in the 3rd switching game. It can prevent more reliably that the number of game balls which can be acquired decreases.

[Appendix I18]
The third entrance (394) is provided in a third entrance (392) having a third upper opening,
The third electric accessory means (391) is movable in the front-rear direction between the third restriction position that covers the third upper opening and the third allowable position that opens the third upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note I7 to Supplementary Note I17, wherein:

[Appendix I19]
The game ball retained in the third electric accessory means (391) is dropped toward the third upper opening when moving backward from the third restricted position to the third allowable position. The gaming machine according to appendix I18, characterized by

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I18 and Supplementary Note I19, the third electric accessory means is moved from the third restricted position to the third permissible position, whereby the game ball moving the third electric accessory means falls and the third A ball is inserted into the third entrance through the upper opening, and as a result, a game ball enters the third entrance. Therefore, it is easy to allow the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means to enter the third entrance, and the third electric accessory means is defined only by defining the operating time of the third electric accessory means. The time for switching games can be fixed. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to fixing the time required for the third game, and it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed.

[Appendix I20]
The staying means (391) includes the third electric accessory means (391) and the third game executing means (41).
The third game executing means (41) is configured to play a game ball by the third electric accessory means (391) until it is switched from the third restricted state to the third allowable state in the third switching game. The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the game machine is switched to a third staying state where the movement is restricted and stayed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I20, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means is retained by switching to the third retention state in the third switching game, and the third allowable state from the third retention state is retained. By switching to the state, a certain number of staying game balls enter the third entrance. Therefore, by controlling the switching from the third staying state to the third permissible state, the number of game balls entering the third entrance can be controlled and the time required for the third switching game can be fixed. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed while securing the game value given to the player.

[Appendix I21]
The third entrance (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means (35) can enter,
The gaming machine according to appendix I20, wherein the third electric accessory means (391) blocks the movement path in the third restricted state.

[Appendix I22]
The third electric accessory means (391) includes a restricting portion (391B) for restricting the movement of the game ball by blocking the movement path in the third restricted state, according to appendix I21, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes I21 and I22, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the moving path of the game ball is blocked by the third electric accessory means, and then the first switching game is executed. It is possible to finish the third game within the interval until it is played.

[Appendix I23]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the staying means (399) holds the game ball in a predetermined area by applying an electromagnetic force or a magnetic force to the game ball.

[Appendix I24]
The gaming machine according to appendix I23, wherein the staying means (399) holds a certain number of gaming balls above the third entrance (394).

[Appendix I25]
The gaming machine according to appendix I23, wherein the staying means (399) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a certain number of game balls.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes I23 to I25, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration of holding the game ball using electromagnetic force or magnetic force, and then the first switching game is executed. It is possible to finish the third game within the interval up to.

[Appendix J1]
A first entrance (376) that allows game balls to enter;
A first restricted state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is restricted and a first permissible state in which entry of a game ball into the first entrance (376) is allowed First electric accessory means (371) for switching between,
Switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and when the first predetermined condition is met, the first switching game (electrical opening and closing game) that is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times First game executing means (41) for executing a game (game per game) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition;
A second entrance including a special second entrance (384) and a normal second entrance (385) different from the first entrance (376);
A second restricted state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is restricted, and a second allowed state in which entry of game balls into the second entrance (384) is allowed. A second electric accessory means (381) for switching between,
A special entry permitting state for allowing a game ball to the special second entrance (385) and a special entrance restriction for restricting a game ball to the special second entrance (385) in the second acceptance state. A switching unit (386) for switching between the states;
Switching unit control means (41) for controlling the operation of the switching unit (386);
The first game is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state, and a second game (a small hit game) including a second switching game that is switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied. The second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41);
A third entrance (394) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first entrance (376) and the second entrance (384);
A third restricted state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which entry of game balls into the third entrance (394) is allowed. A third electric accessory means (391) for switching between,
A third switching game (round game) in which a privilege can be given to a player by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowed state and switching to the third restricted state when a third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric game means based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when a game ball enters the special second entrance (384). Third game execution means (41) executed by controlling (391);
With
The third game execution means (41), when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game execution means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, A gaming machine, wherein the third game is executed in an interval between the first switching games.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, a state where the game ball is allowed to enter the special second entrance is selected and a state where the game ball is allowed to be restricted are selected by switching the switching unit in the second allowable state. Therefore, by controlling the switching of the switching unit in the second allowable state, various games can be given. For example, the probability of entering a game ball into the special second entry port in the second permissible state can be adjusted by the switching pattern of the switching unit (the number of times of switching and the time of the special entrance permissible state). Thereby, a game ball in which the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching a normal game ball in the second game, or a game ball at the special second entrance in the second game. If the ball is not entered, it is possible to provide a game where a jackpot game is not executed and so-called puncture occurs. Since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the pitch probability, the gameability can be adjusted based on the puncture occurrence rate.

  Further, as will be described later, when the third game is executed in the second allowable state, the switching unit can be controlled so that the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted. It is. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent an opportunity to execute the third game during execution of the third game, it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during execution of the third game.

  Further, in the second permissible state, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the special second entrance when a game ball enters the special second entrance. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls that enter the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of entrances to the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Usually, the player can enter the second entrance.

[Appendix J2]
The switching unit control means (41) is configured to switch the switching by the second game execution means (41) when a game ball enters the special second entrance (385) in the second allowable state. The gaming machine according to appendix J1, wherein the gaming machine is switched from the special entry permission state to the special entry restriction state by controlling a portion.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J2, the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted when the game ball enters the special second entrance. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls that enter the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of entrances to the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Usually, the player can enter the second entrance.

[Appendix J3]
The game according to appendix J1 or appendix J2, wherein the third specific condition is that a game ball is inserted into the special second entrance when the third game is not executed Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, when the third game is being executed in the second permissible state, the switching unit may be controlled to a state where the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted. Is possible. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent an opportunity to execute the third game during execution of the third game, it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during execution of the third game.

[Appendix J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix J1 to appendix J3, wherein the second predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed since switching to the second allowable state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J4, the game machine is switched to the second restricted state when a predetermined time elapses after being switched to the second allowable state. Therefore, depending on the setting of the predetermined time, it is possible to adjust the probability of the game ball entering the special second entrance in the second allowable state. Thereby, a game ball in which the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching a normal game ball in the second game, or a game ball at the special second entrance in the second game. If the ball is not entered, it is possible to provide a game where a jackpot game is not executed and so-called puncture occurs. Since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the pitch probability, the gameability can be adjusted based on the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix J5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J4, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time equal to or longer than a game ball firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds).

[Appendix J6]
The gaming machine according to appendix J5, wherein the predetermined time is set to be 1 to 30 times (for example, 0.6 seconds to 18 seconds) of the firing interval.

[Appendix J7]
The gaming machine according to appendix J5, wherein the predetermined time is set to be not less than 2 times and not more than 20 times (for example, not less than 1.2 seconds and not more than 12 seconds) of the firing interval.

[Appendix J8]
The gaming machine according to appendix J5, wherein the predetermined time is set to be not less than 3 times and not more than 10 times (for example, not less than 1.8 seconds and not more than 6 seconds) of the firing interval.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix J5 to appendix J8, the predetermined time from when switched to the second permissible state to when switched to the second restricted state is not less than the launch interval of the game ball, for example, not less than 1 and not more than 30 times the launch interval Preferably, it is set to be not less than 2 times and not more than 20 times the firing interval, and more preferably not less than 3 times and not more than 10 times the firing interval. As a result, a normal game ball is launched in the second game, so that the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance, and a game is provided in which puncture does not occur as long as normal launch is performed.

[Appendix J9]
The probability of entering the special second entrance (384) in the second allowable state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability, according to any one of appendix J1 to appendix J4, Game machines.

[Appendix J10]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 1% or more and 95% or less.

[Appendix J11]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 20% or more and 90% or less.

[Appendix J12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J9, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 50% or more and 80% or less.

  In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J9 to J12, the probability of entering the special second entrance in the second allowable state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability, for example, 1% or more and 95% or less. Is set, preferably 20% or more and 90% or less, more preferably 50% or more and 80% or less. Thereby, in the second game, a game property in which a so-called puncture is generated in which the third game is not executed because the game ball is not entered in the special second entrance can be provided. Since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the pitch probability, the gameability can be adjusted based on the puncture occurrence rate.

10: Game machine 313: General winning opening 341: Symbol display section 35: Prescribed passage 351: Opening hole for electric winning award 352: Opening opening for V winning 353: Opening section for variable winning 354: Out opening 36: Main display section 361 : Normal symbol display unit 362: Multi-game game number display unit 363: Special symbol display unit 37: Electric role winning device 371: Electric role winning door 372: Electric role winning unit 373: Guide portion 374: Concave portion 375: Upper opening 376 : Electrical winning award 37a: Electrical winning sensor 38: V winning device 381: V winning door 382: V winning part 383: Upper opening 384: V winning opening 385: Normal winning opening 386: Switching part 38a: V winning sensor 38b : Normal winning sensor 39: variable winning device 39 a: variable winning sensor 391: variable winning door 392: variable winning portion 393: upper opening 394: variable winning opening 395: groove 398: recess 3 9: electromagnetic force generator 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

A first entrance where game balls can enter,
A first electric combination that switches between a first restricted state where entry of a game ball into the first entrance is restricted and a first permissible state where entry of a game ball into the first entrance is allowed. Material means,
Switch from the first restricted state to the first permissible state, and specify a first game in which the first switching game that is switched to the first restricted state when the first predetermined condition is satisfied is executed one or more times First game execution means that is executed by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means based on establishment of a condition;
A second entrance that is different from the first entrance, and is capable of entering a game ball;
A second motor combination that switches between a second restricted state where entry of game balls into the second entrance is restricted and a second permissible state where entry of game balls into the second entrance is allowed. Material means,
The second game including the second switching game that is switched from the second restricted state to the second permissible state and switched to the second restricted state when a second predetermined condition is satisfied is sent to the first entrance. Second game execution means that is executed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means based on the establishment of a second specific condition that can be established when a game ball enters the game;
A third entrance that is different from the first entrance and the second entrance;
A third motor combination that switches between a third restricted state where entry of game balls into the third entrance is restricted and a third permissible state where entry of game balls into the third entrance is allowed. Material means,
A third game including a third switching game in which a privilege can be given to the player by switching to the third restricted state from the third restricted state to the third allowed state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. Third game execution means for executing a game by controlling the third electric accessory means based on the establishment of a third specific condition established when the game ball enters the second entrance. When,
Route defining means for defining the movement route of the game ball launched into the predetermined area in the same route;
Retaining means for retaining the game ball that has moved along the movement route at a position where the game ball can enter the third entrance in the third game switching;
With
The third game executing means is configured to execute the first switching game between the first switching games when the first game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed in the interval of
The game ball retained in the retention means enters the third entrance in the third allowable state,
The gaming machine, wherein the third switching game has a fixed allowed entry time for switching to the third restricted state after switching to the third allowed state.

Images